TI1 MSP432P401R Mixed-signal microcontroller Datasheet

Product
Folder
Sample &
Buy
Technical
Documents
Tools &
Software
Support &
Community
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
MSP432P401x Mixed-Signal Microcontrollers
1 Device Overview
1.1
Features
• Core
– ARM® 32-Bit Cortex®-M4F CPU With Floating
Point Unit and Memory Protection Unit
– Frequency up to 48 MHz
– Performance Benchmark:
• 1.196 DMIPS/MHz (Dhrystone 2.1)
• 3.41 CoreMark/MHz
– Energy Benchmark:
• 167.4 ULPBench® Score
• Memories
– Up to 256KB of Flash Main Memory
(Simultaneous Read and Execute During
Program or Erase)
– 16KB of Flash Information Memory
– Up to 64KB of SRAM (Including 8KB of Backup
Memory)
– 32KB of ROM With MSPWare Driver Libraries
• Code Security Features
– JTAG and SWD Lock
– IP Protection (Up to Four Secure Flash Zones,
Each With Configurable Start Address and Size)
• Operating Characteristics
– Wide Supply Voltage Range: 1.62 V to 3.7 V
– Temperature Range (Ambient): –40°C to 85°C
• Ultra-Low-Power Operating Modes
– Active: 90 µA/MHz
– Low-Frequency Active: 90 µA (at 128 kHz)
– LPM3 (With RTC): 850 nA
– LPM3.5 (With RTC): 800 nA
– LPM4.5: 25 nA
• Flexible Clocking Features
– Programmable Internal DCO (up to 48 MHz)
– 32.768-kHz Low-Frequency Crystal Support
(LFXT)
– High-Frequency Crystal Support (HFXT) up to
48 MHz
– Low-Frequency Trimmed Internal Reference
Oscillator (REFO)
– Very Low-Power Low-Frequency Internal
Oscillator (VLO)
– Module Oscillator (MODOSC)
– System Oscillator (SYSOSC)
• Enhanced System Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
– Programmable Supervision and Monitoring of
Supply Voltage
– Multiple-Class Resets for Better Control of
Application and Debug
– Eight-Channel DMA
– Real-Time Clock (RTC) With Calendar and
Alarm Functions
Timing and Control
– Up to Four 16-Bit Timers, Each With up to Five
Capture, Compare, PWM Capability
– Two 32-Bit Timers, Each With Interrupt
Generation Capability
Serial Communication
– Up to Four eUSCI_A Modules
• UART With Automatic Baud-Rate Detection
• IrDA Encode and Decode
• SPI (up to 16 Mbps)
– Up to Four eUSCI_B Modules
• I2C (With Multiple-Slave Addressing)
• SPI (up to 16 Mbps)
Flexible I/O Features
– Ultra-Low-Leakage I/Os (±20 nA Maximum)
– Up to Four High-Drive I/Os (20-mA Capability)
– All I/Os With Capacitive Touch Capability
– Up to 48 I/Os With Interrupt and Wake-up
Capability
– Up to 24 I/Os With Port Mapping Capability
– Eight I/Os With Glitch Filtering Capability
Advanced Low-Power Analog Features
– 14-Bit, 1-MSPS SAR ADC
– Internal Voltage Reference With 10-ppm/°C
Typical Stability
– Two Analog Comparators
Encryption and Data Integrity Accelerators
– 128-, 192-, or 256-Bit AES Encryption and
Decryption Accelerator
– 32-Bit Hardware CRC Engine
JTAG and Debug Support
– Support for 4-Pin JTAG and 2-Pin SWD Debug
Interfaces
– Support for Serial Wire Trace
– Support for Power Debug and Profiling of
Applications
1
An IMPORTANT NOTICE at the end of this data sheet addresses availability, warranty, changes, use in safety-critical applications,
intellectual property matters and other important disclaimers. PRODUCT PREVIEW Information. Product in design phase of
development. Subject to change or discontinuance without notice.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
1
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
1.2
•
•
Applications
Industrial and Automation
– Home Automation
– Smoke Detectors
– Barcode Scanners
Metering
– Electric Meters
– Flow Meters
1.3
www.ti.com
•
•
Health and Fitness
– Watches
– Activity Monitors
– Fitness Accessories
– Blood Glucose Meters
Consumer Electronics
– Mobile Devices
– Sensor Hubs
Description
The MSP432P401x device family is TI's latest addition to its portfolio of efficient ultra-low-power mixedsignal MCUs. The MSP432P401x family features the ARM Cortex-M4 processor in a wide configuration of
device options including a rich set of analog, timing, and communication peripherals, thereby catering to a
large number of application scenarios where both efficient data processing and enhanced low-power
operation are paramount.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Overall, the MSP432P401x is an ideal combination of the TI MSP430™ low-power DNA, advance mixedsignal features, and the processing capabilities of the ARM 32-bit Cortex-M4 RISC engine. The devices
ship with bundled driver libraries and are compatible with standardized components of the ARM
ecosystem.
Device Information (1)
PACKAGE (PIN)
BODY SIZE (2)
MSP432P401RIPZ
MSP432P401MIPZ
LQFP (100)
14 mm × 14 mm
MSP432P401RIZXH
MSP432P401MIZXH
NFBGA (80)
5 mm × 5 mm
MSP432P401RIRGC
MSP432P401MIRGC
VQFN (64)
9 mm × 9 mm
PART NUMBER
(1)
(2)
2
For the most current part, package, and ordering information for all available devices, see the Package
Option Addendum in Section 9, or see the TI website at www.ti.com.
The sizes shown here are approximations. For the package dimensions with tolerances, see the
Mechanical Data in Section 9.
Device Overview
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
1.4
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 1-1 shows the functional block diagram of the MSP432P401x devices.
LFXIN, LFXOUT,
HFXIN HFXOUT
DCOR
P1.x to P10.x
PJ.x
LPM3.5 Domain
DMA
PCM
PSS
CS
RTC_C
Power
Control
Manager
Power
Supply
System
Clock
System
ROM
WDT_A
Backup
Memory
Real
Time
Clock
Watchdog
Timer
SRAM
8KB
RSTCTL
SYSCTL
AES256
Reset
Controller
System
Controller
Security
Encryption,
Decryption
Capacitive Touch I/O 0,
Capacitive Touch I/O 1
I/O Ports
I/O Ports
P1 to P10
78 I/Os
PJ
6 I/Os
8 Channels
Address
CPU
Bus
Control
Logic
Data
SRAM
Flash
256KB
128KB
(includes
Backup
Memory)
64KB
32KB
(Driver
Library)
32KB
CRC32
MPU
NVIC, SysTick
FPB, DWT
ADC14
ITM, TPIU
JTAG, SWD
14-bit
1 Msps
SAR A/D
Comp_E0
Comp_E1
REF_A
TA0, TA1
TA2, TA3
Timer32
Analog
Comparator
Voltage
Reference
Timer_A
16-Bit
5 CCR
Two 32-bit
Timers
eUSCI_A0
eUSCI_A1
eUSCI_A2
eUSCI_A3
eUSCI_B0
eUSCI_B1
eUSCI_B2
eUSCI_B3
(UART,
IrDA, SPI)
(I2C, SPI)
Figure 1-1. MSP432P401x Functional Block Diagram
The CPU and all the peripherals in the device interact with each other through a common AHB matrix. In
some cases, there are bridges between the AHB ports and the peripherals. These bridges are transparent
to the application from a memory map perspective and hence not shown in the block diagram.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Device Overview
3
PRODUCT PREVIEW
ARM
Cortex-M4F
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table of Contents
1
2
3
4
5
Device Overview ......................................... 1
6.2
Memory Map
1.1
Features .............................................. 1
6.3
Memories on the MSP432P401x .................... 66
1.2
Applications ........................................... 2
6.4
DMA ................................................. 75
1.3
Description ............................................ 2
6.5
Memory Map Access Details ........................ 76
1.4
Functional Block Diagram ............................ 3
6.6
Interrupts
Revision History ......................................... 4
Device Comparison ..................................... 5
Terminal Configuration and Functions .............. 6
6.7
System Control ...................................... 82
Code Development and Debug
15
.......................................... 87
..................... 98
6.10 Input/Output Schematics ........................... 100
6.11 Device Descriptors (TLV) .......................... 139
Applications, Implementation, and Layout ...... 141
7.1
Device Connection and Layout Fundamentals .... 141
15
7.2
Peripheral and Interface-Specific Design
Information ......................................... 142
Signal Descriptions .................................. 10
Specifications ........................................... 15
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
PRODUCT PREVIEW
5.7
5.8
7
15
16
8
Device and Documentation Support .............. 144
16
8.1
Device Support..................................... 144
17
8.2
Documentation Support ............................ 146
17
8.3
Trademarks ........................................ 147
Operating Mode Execution Frequency vs Flash
Wait-State Requirements ........................... 18
8.4
Electrostatic Discharge Caution
...............................
5.10 Timing and Switching Characteristics ...............
Detailed Description ...................................
6.1
Processor and Execution Features .................
5.9
6
Peripherals
Pin Diagrams ......................................... 6
........................
ESD Ratings ........................................
Recommended Operating Conditions ...............
Recommended External Components .............
Operating Mode VCC Ranges .......................
Operating Mode CPU Frequency Ranges ..........
Operating Mode Peripheral Frequency Ranges ....
78
6.9
4.2
Absolute Maximum Ratings
............................................
61
6.8
4.1
5.1
........................................
Current Consumption
8.5
19
8.6
147
147
147
60
Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable
Information ............................................. 148
60
9.1
23
9
...................
Export Control Notice ..............................
Glossary............................................
Packaging Information ............................. 148
2 Revision History
NOTE: Page numbers for previous revisions may differ from page numbers in the current version.
Changes from March 31, 2015 to February 16, 2016
•
4
Page
Changed the MIN value of the NEndurance parameter from 100k cycles to 20000 cycles in Table 5-53, Flash
Memory .............................................................................................................................. 58
Revision History
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
3 Device Comparison
Table 3-1 lists the features of the MSP432P401x devices.
Table 3-1. Device Comparison (1)
(1)
(2)
CHANNEL
B:
SPI, I2C
20-mA
DRIVE I/O
TOTAL
I/Os
PACKAGE
TYPE
100 PZ
DEVICE
FLASH
(KB)
SRAM
(KB)
ADC14
CHANNELS
Comparator-E0
CHANNELS
Comparator-E1
CHANNELS
Timer_A (2)
MSP432P401RIPZ
256
64
24 ext, 2 int
8
8
5, 5, 5, 5
4
4
4
84
MSP432P401MIPZ
128
32
24 ext, 2 int
8
8
5, 5, 5, 5
4
4
4
84
100 PZ
MSP432P401RIZXH
256
64
16 ext, 2 int
6
8
5, 5, 5
3
4
4
64
80 ZXH
MSP432P401MIZXH
128
32
16 ext, 2 int
6
8
5, 5, 5
3
4
4
64
80 ZXH
MSP432P401RIRGC
256
64
12 ext, 2 int
2
4
5, 5, 5
3
3
4
48
64 RGC
MSP432P401MIRGC
128
32
12 ext, 2 int
2
4
5, 5, 5
3
3
4
48
64 RGC
PRODUCT PREVIEW
eUSCI
CHANNEL
A:
UART,
IrDA, SPI
For the most current part, package, and ordering information for all available devices, see the Package Option Addendum in Section 9, or see the TI website at www.ti.com.
Each number in the sequence represents an instantiation of Timer_A with its associated number of capture compare registers and PWM output generators available. For example, a
number sequence of 3, 5 would represent two instantiations of Timer_A, the first instantiation having 3 and the second instantiation having 5 capture compare registers and PWM output
generators, respectively.
Device Comparison
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
5
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
4 Terminal Configuration and Functions
4.1
Pin Diagrams
Figure 4-1 shows the pinout of the 100-pin PZ package.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
6
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
P6.2/UCB1STE/C1.5
P6.3/UCB1CLK/C1.4
P6.4/UCB1SIMO/UCB1SDA/C1.3
P6.5/UCB1SOMI/UCB1SCL/C1.2
P6.6/TA2.3/UCB3SIMO/UCB3SDA/C1.1
P6.7/TA2.4/UCB3SOMI/UCB3SCL/C1.0
DVSS3
RSTn/NMI
AVSS2
PJ.2/HFXOUT
PJ.3/HFXIN
AVCC2
P7.0/PM_SMCLK/PM_DMAE0
P7.1/PM_C0OUT/PM_TA0CLK
P7.2/PM_C1OUT/PM_TA1CLK
P7.3/PM_TA0.0
PJ.4/TDI/ADC14CLK
PJ.5/TDO/SWO
SWDIOTMS
SWCLKTCK
P9.4/UCA3STE
P9.5/UCA3CLK
P9.6/UCA3RXD/UCA3SOMI
P9.7/UCA3TXD/UCA3SIMO
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
P10.0/UCB3STE
www.ti.com
67
P5.3/A2
P1.6/UCB0SIMO/UCB0SDA
10
66
P5.2/A3
P1.7/UCB0SOMI/UCB0SCL
11
65
P5.1/A4
VCORE
12
64
P5.0/A5
DVCC1
13
63
P4.7/A6
VSW
14
62
P4.6/A7
DVSS1
15
61
P4.5/A8
P2.0/PM_UCA1STE
16
60
P4.4/HSMCLK/SVMHOUT/A9
P2.1/PM_UCA1CLK
17
59
P4.3/MCLK/RTCCLK/A10
P2.2/PM_UCA1RXD/PM_UCA1SOMI
18
58
P4.2/ACLK/TA2CLK/A11
P2.3/PM_UCA1TXD/PM_UCA1SIMO
19
57
P4.1/A12
P2.4/PM_TA0.1
20
56
P4.0/A13
P2.5/PM_TA0.2
21
55
P6.1/A14
P2.6/PM_TA0.3
22
54
P6.0/A15
P2.7/PM_TA0.4
23
53
P9.1/A16
P10.4/TA3.0/C0.7
24
52
P9.0/A17
P10.5/TA3.1/C0.6
25
51
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
P8.7/A18
P8.6/A19
P7.4/PM_TA1.4/C0.5
PRODUCT PREVIEW
9
P8.5/A20
P5.4/A1
P1.5/UCB0CLK
P8.4/A21
68
P8.3/TA3CLK/A22
8
P8.2/TA3.2/A23
P5.5/A0
P1.4/UCB0STE
AVCC1
69
DCOR
7
AVSS1
P5.6/TA2.1/VREF+/VeREF+/C1.7
P1.3/UCA0TXD/UCA0SIMO
PJ.1/LFXOUT
70
PJ.0/LFXIN
6
AVSS3
P5.7/TA2.2/VREF-/VeREF-/C1.6
P1.2/UCA0RXD/UCA0SOMI
P3.7/PM_UCB2SOMI/PM_UCB2SCL
71
P3.6/PM_UCB2SIMO/PM_UCB2SDA
5
P3.5/PM_UCB2CLK
DVSS2
P1.1/UCA0CLK
P3.4/PM_UCB2STE
72
P3.3/PM_UCA2TXD/PM_UCA2SIMO
4
P3.2/PM_UCA2RXD/PM_UCA2SOMI
DVCC2
P1.0/UCA0STE
P3.1/PM_UCA2CLK
73
P3.0/PM_UCA2STE
3
P8.1/UCB3CLK/TA2.0/C0.0
P9.2/TA3.3
P10.3/UCB3SOMI/UCB3SCL
P8.0/UCB3STE/TA1.0/C0.1
74
P7.7/PM_TA1.1/C0.2
2
P7.6/PM_TA1.2/C0.3
P9.3/TA3.4
P10.2/UCB3SIMO/UCB3SDA
P7.5/PM_TA1.3/C0.4
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
1
75
P10.1/UCB3CLK
Notes:
1. The secondary digital functions on Ports P2, P3, and P7 are fully mappable. The pin designation shows only the
default mapping. See Table 6-19 for details.
2. Glitch filter is implemented on the following 8 digital I/Os: P1.0, P1.4, P1.5, P3.0, P3.4, P3.5, P6.6, P6.7.
3. UART BSL pins: P1.2 - BSLRXD, P1.3 - BSLTXD
4. SPI BSL pins: P1.4 - BSLSTE, P1.5 - BSLCLK, P1.6 - BSLSIMO, P1.7 - BSLSOMI
5. I2C BSL pins: P3.6 - BSLSDA, P3.7 - BSLSCL
Figure 4-1. 100-Pin PZ Package (Top View)
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
7
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Figure 4-2 shows the pinout of the 80-pin ZXH package.
P1.0 SWCLKTCK PJ.5
A1
A2
A3
P1.1 SWDIOTMS PJ.4
B1
B2
B3
P1.5 VCORE
P7.3
PJ.3
PJ.2
P6.5
P6.4
P6.2
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
P6.6
P6.3
B8
B9
P7.2
B4
P1.2
P5.3
P5.4
P5.6
D7
D8
D9
P5.0
P5.1
P5.2
E7
E8
E9
P1.4
D2
D3
D4
P1.7
VSW
P2.2
P2.0
E1
E2
E3
E4
P2.6
C5
C6
P5.7
D5
DVCC1
D1
P2.5
P7.1 DVCC2 DVSS3 P5.5
P1.3 AVCC2 AVSS2
P1.6
F2
B7
C9
C4
DVSS1 P2.4
B6
C8
C2
F1
B5
C7
C1
P2.1
P7.0 RSTn/NMI P6.7
D6
AVSS3 DVSS2
E5
E6
AVSS1 AVCC1
P4.5
P4.6
P4.7
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
P2.3
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P7.7
P8.1
P3.2
P3.5
P4.2
P4.3
P4.4
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
P2.7
P7.5
P8.0
P3.1
P3.4
P3.7
P6.1
P4.1
P4.0
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
P7.4
P7.6
P3.0
P3.3
P3.6
PJ.0
PJ.1
DCOR
P6.0
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
Notes:
1. Glitch filter is implemented on the following 8 digital I/Os: P1.0, P1.4, P1.5, P3.0, P3.4, P3.5, P6.6, P6.7.
2. UART BSL pins: P1.2 - BSLRXD, P1.3 - BSLTXD
3. SPI BSL pins: P1.4 - BSLSTE, P1.5 - BSLCLK, P1.6 - BSLSIMO, P1.7 - BSLSOMI
4. I2C BSL pins: P3.6 - BSLSDA, P3.7 - BSLSCL
Figure 4-2. 80-Pin ZXH Package (Top View)
8
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
P6.6/TA2.3/UCB3SIMO/UCB3SDA/C1.1
P6.7/TA2.4/UCB3SOMI/UCB3SCL/C1.0
DVSS3
RSTn/NMI
AVSS2
PJ.2/HFXOUT
PJ.3/HFXIN
AVCC2
P7.0/PM_SMCLK/PM_DMAE0
P7.1/PM_C0OUT/PM_TA0CLK
P7.2/PM_C1OUT/PM_TA1CLK
P7.3/PM_TA0.0
PJ.4/TDI/ADC14CLK
PJ.5/TDO/SWO
SWDIOTMS
SWCLKTCK
Figure 4-3 shows the pinout of the 64-pin RGC package.
1
48
DVCC2
P1.1/UCA0CLK
2
47
DVSS2
P1.2/UCA0RXD/UCA0SOMI
3
46
P5.7/TA2.2/VREF-/VeREF-/C1.6
P1.3/UCA0TXD/UCA0SIMO
4
45
P5.6/TA2.1/VREF+/VeREF+/C1.7
P1.4/UCB0STE
5
44
P5.5/A0
P1.5/UCB0CLK
6
43
P5.4/A1
P1.6/UCB0SIMO/UCB0SDA
7
42
P5.3/A2
P1.7/UCB0SOMI/UCB0SCL
8
41
P5.2/A3
VCORE
9
40
P5.1/A4
DVCC1
10
39
P5.0/A5
VSW
11
38
P4.7/A6
DVSS1
12
37
P4.6/A7
DCOR
P4.2/ACLK/TA2CLK/A11
AVCC1
AVSS1
PJ.1/LFXOUT
PJ.0/LFXIN
AVSS3
P3.7/PM_UCB2SOMI/PM_UCB2SCL
P3.6/PM_UCB2SIMO/PM_UCB2SDA
16
33
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
P3.5/PM_UCB2CLK
P4.3/MCLK/RTCCLK/A10
P2.3/PM_UCA1TXD/PM_UCA1SIMO
P3.4/PM_UCB2STE
34
P3.3/PM_UCA2TXD/PM_UCA2SIMO
15
P3.2/PM_UCA2RXD/PM_UCA2SOMI
P4.4/HSMCLK/SVMHOUT/A9
P2.2/PM_UCA1RXD/PM_UCA1SOMI
P3.1/PM_UCA2CLK
P4.5/A8
35
P3.0/PM_UCA2STE
36
14
P8.1/UCB3CLK/TA2.0/C0.0
13
P8.0/UCB3STE/TA1.0/C0.1
P2.0/PM_UCA1STE
P2.1/PM_UCA1CLK
PRODUCT PREVIEW
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
P1.0/UCA0STE
Notes:
1. The secondary digital functions on Ports P2, P3, and P7 are fully mappable. The pin designation shows only the
default mapping. See Table 6-19 for details.
2. Glitch filter is implemented on the following 8 digital I/Os: P1.0, P1.4, P1.5, P3.0, P3.4, P3.5, P6.6, P6.7.
TI recommends connecting the thermal pad on the QFN package to DVSS.
4. UART BSL pins: P1.2 - BSLRXD, P1.3 - BSLTXD
5. SPI BSL pins: P1.4 - BSLSTE, P1.5 - BSLCLK, P1.6 - BSLSIMO, P1.7 - BSLSOMI
6. I2C BSL pins: P3.6 - BSLSDA, P3.7 - BSLSCL
Figure 4-3. 64-Pin RGC Package (Top View)
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
9
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
4.2
www.ti.com
Signal Descriptions
Table 4-1 describes the signals for all device variants and package options.
Table 4-1. Signal Descriptions
TERMINAL
NAME
NO. (2)
I/O (1)
DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PZ
ZXH
RGC
P10.1/
UCB3CLK
1
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Clock signal input – eUSCI_B3 SPI slave mode
Clock signal output – eUSCI_B3 SPI master mode
P10.2/
UCB3SIMO/UCB3SDA
2
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Slave in, master out – eUSCI_B3 SPI mode
I2C data – eUSCI_B3 I2C mode
P10.3/
UCB3SOMI/UCB3SCL
3
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Slave out, master in – eUSCI_B3 SPI mode
I2C clock – eUSCI_B3 I2C mode
P1.0/
UCA0STE
4
A1
1
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt, wake-up and glitch filtering
capability
Slave transmit enable – eUSCI_A0 SPI mode
P1.1/
UCA0CLK
5
B1
2
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Clock signal input – eUSCI_A0 SPI slave mode
Clock signal output – eUSCI_Ao0 SPI master mode
P1.2/
UCA0RXD/UCA0SOMI
6
C4
3
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Receive data – eUSCI_A0 UART mode
Slave out, master in – eUSCI_A0 SPI mode
P1.3/
UCA0TXD/UCA0SIMO
7
D4
4
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Transmit data – eUSCI_A0 UART mode
Slave in, master out – eUSCI_A0 SPI mode
P1.4/
UCB0STE
8
D3
5
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt, wake-up and glitch filtering
capability
Slave transmit enable – eUSCI_B0 SPI mode
P1.5/
UCB0CLK
9
C1
6
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt, wake-up and glitch filtering
capability
Clock signal input – eUSCI_B0 SPI slave mode
Clock signal output – eUSCI_B0 SPI master mode
P1.6/
UCB0SIMO/UCB0SDA
10
D1
7
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Slave in, master out – eUSCI_B0 SPI mode
I2C data – eUSCI_B0 I2C mode
P1.7/
UCB0SOMI/UCB0SCL
11
E1
8
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Slave out, master in – eUSCI_B0 SPI mode
I2C clock – eUSCI_B0 I2C mode
VCORE (3)
12
C2
9
Regulated core power supply (internal use only, no external current
loading)
DVCC1
13
D2
10
Digital power supply
VSW
14
E2
11
DC-to-DC converter switching output.
DVSS1
15
F2
12
Digital ground supply
P2.0/
PM_UCA1STE
16
E4
13
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Slave transmit enable – eUSCI_A1 SPI mode
P2.1/
PM_UCA1CLK
17
F1
14
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Clock signal input – eUSCI_A1 SPI slave mode
Clock signal output – eUSCI_A1 SPI master mode
P2.2/
PM_UCA1RXD/
PM_UCA1SOMI
18
E3
15
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Receive data – eUSCI_A1 UART mode
Slave out, master in – eUSCI_A1 SPI mode
(1)
(2)
(3)
10
I = input, O = output
N/A = not available
VCORE is for internal use only. No external current loading is possible. VCORE should only be connected to the recommended
capacitor value, CVCORE.
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 4-1. Signal Descriptions (continued)
TERMINAL
NO. (2)
I/O (1)
DESCRIPTION
PZ
ZXH
RGC
P2.3/
PM_UCA1TXD/
PM_UCA1SIMO
19
F4
16
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Transmit data – eUSCI_A1 UART mode
Slave in, master out – eUSCI_A1 SPI mode
P2.4/
PM_TA0.1
20
F3
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
TA0 CCR1 capture: CCI1A input, compare: Out1
P2.5/
PM_TA0.2
21
G1
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
TA0 CCR2 capture: CCI2A input, compare: Out2
P2.6/
PM_TA0.3
22
G2
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
TA0 CCR3 capture: CCI3A input, compare: Out3
P2.7/
PM_TA0.4
23
H1
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
TA0 CCR4 capture: CCI4A input, compare: Out4
P10.4/
TA3.0/
C0.7
24
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA3 CCR0 capture: CCI0A input, compare: Out0
Comparator_E0 input 7
P10.5/
TA3.1/
C0.6
25
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA3 CCR1 capture: CCI1A input, compare: Out1
Comparator_E0 input 6
P7.4/
PM_TA1.4/
C0.5
26
J1
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA1 CCR4 capture: CCI4A input, compare: Out4
Comparator_E0 input 5
P7.5/
PM_TA1.3/
C0.4
27
H2
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA1 CCR3 capture: CCI3A input, compare: Out3
Comparator_E0 input 4
P7.6/
PM_TA1.2/
C0.3
28
J2
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA1 CCR2 capture: CCI2A input, compare: Out2
Comparator_E0 input 3
P7.7/
PM_TA1.1/
C0.2
29
G3
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA1 CCR1 capture: CCI1A input, compare: Out1
Comparator_E0 input 2
P8.0/
UCB3STE/
TA1.0/
C0.1
30
H3
17
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Slave transmit enable – eUSCI_B3 SPI mode
TA1 CCR0 capture: CCI0A input, compare: Out0
Comparator_E0 input 1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NAME
P8.1/
UCB3CLK/
TA2.0/
C0.0
31
G4
18
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Clock signal input – eUSCI_B3 SPI slave mode
Clock signal output – eUSCI_B3 SPI master mode
TA2 CCR0 capture: CCI0A input, compare: Out0
Comparator_E0 input 0
P3.0/
PM_UCA2STE
32
J3
19
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt, wake-up and glitch filtering
capability
Slave transmit enable – eUSCI_A2 SPI mode
P3.1/
PM_UCA2CLK
33
H4
20
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Clock signal input – eUSCI_A2 SPI slave mode
Clock signal output – eUSCI_A2 SPI master mode
P3.2/
PM_UCA2RXD/
PM_UCA2SOMI
34
G5
21
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Receive data – eUSCI_A2 UART mode
Slave out, master in – eUSCI_A2 SPI mode
P3.3/
PM_UCA2TXD/
PM_UCA2SIMO
35
J4
22
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Transmit data – eUSCI_A2 UART mode
Slave in, master out – eUSCI_A2 SPI mode
P3.4/
PM_UCB2STE
36
H5
23
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt, wake-up and glitch filtering
capability
Slave transmit enable – eUSCI_B2 SPI mode
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt, wake-up and glitch filtering
capability
Clock signal input – eUSCI_B2 SPI slave mode
Clock signal output – eUSCI_B2 SPI master mode
P3.5/
PM_UCB2CLK
37
G6
24
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
11
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Signal Descriptions (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
NO. (2)
I/O (1)
DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PZ
ZXH
RGC
P3.6/
PM_UCB2SIMO/
PM_UCB2SDA
38
J5
25
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Slave in, master out – eUSCI_B2 SPI mode
I2C data – eUSCI_B2 I2C mode
P3.7/
PM_UCB2SOMI/
PM_UCB2SCL
39
H6
26
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Slave out, master in – eUSCI_B2 SPI mode
I2C clock – eUSCI_B2 I2C mode
AVSS3
40
E5
27
PJ.0/
LFXIN
41
J6
28
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Input for low-frequency crystal oscillator LFXT
PJ.1/
LFXOUT
42
J7
29
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Output of low-frequency crystal oscillator LFXT
AVSS1
43
F5
30
Analog ground supply
DCOR
44
J8
31
DCO external resistor pin
AVCC1
45
F6
32
Analog power supply
P8.2/
TA3.2/
A23
46
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA3 CCR2 capture: CCI2A input, compare: Out2
ADC analog input A23
P8.3/
TA3CLK/
A22
47
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA3 input clock
ADC analog input A22
P8.4/
A21
48
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
ADC analog input A21
P8.5/
A20
49
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
ADC analog input A20
P8.6/
A19
50
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
ADC analog input A19
P8.7/
A18
51
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
ADC analog input A18
P9.0/
A17
52
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
ADC analog input A17
P9.1/
A16
53
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
ADC analog input A16
P6.0/
A15
54
J9
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability.
ADC analog input A15
P6.1/
A14
55
H7
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability.
ADC analog input A14
P4.0/
A13
56
H9
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability.
ADC analog input A13
P4.1/
A12
57
H8
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability.
ADC analog input A12
P4.2/
ACLK/
TA2CLK/
A11
58
G7
33
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability.
ACLK clock output
TA2 input clock
ADC analog input A11
P4.3/
MCLK/
RTCCLK/
A10
59
G8
34
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability.
MCLK clock output
RTC_C clock calibration output
ADC analog input A10
Analog ground supply
P4.4/
HSMCLK/
SVMHOUT/
A9
60
G9
35
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
HSMCLK clock output
SVMH output
ADC analog input A9
P4.5/
A8
61
F7
36
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
ADC analog input A8
12
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 4-1. Signal Descriptions (continued)
TERMINAL
NO. (2)
I/O (1)
DESCRIPTION
PZ
ZXH
RGC
P4.6/
A7
62
F8
37
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
ADC analog input A7
P4.7/
A6
63
F9
38
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
ADC analog input A6
P5.0/
A5
64
E7
39
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
ADC analog input A5
P5.1/
A4
65
E8
40
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
ADC analog input A4
P5.2/
A3
66
E9
41
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
ADC analog input A3
P5.3/
A2
67
D7
42
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
ADC analog input A2
P5.4/
A1
68
D8
43
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
ADC analog input A1
P5.5/
A0
69
C8
44
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
ADC analog input A0
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
TA2 CCR1 capture: CCI1A input, compare: Out1
Internal shared reference voltage positive terminal
Positive terminal of external reference voltage to ADC
Comparator_E1 input 7
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
TA2 CCR2 capture: CCI2A input, compare: Out2
Internal shared reference voltage negative terminal
Negative terminal of external reference voltage to ADC (recommended to
connect to onboard ground)
Comparator_E1 input 6
P5.6/
TA2.1/
VREF+/
VeREF+/
C1.7
70
D9
45
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NAME
P5.7/
TA2.2/
VREF-/
VeREF-/
C1.6
71
C9
46
DVSS2
72
E6
47
Digital ground supply
DVCC2
73
C6
48
Digital power supply
P9.2/
TA3.3
74
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA3 CCR3 capture: CCI3A input, compare: Out3
P9.3/
TA3.4
75
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA3 CCR4 capture: CCI4A input, compare: Out4
P6.2/
UCB1STE/
C1.5
76
A9
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Slave transmit enable – eUSCI_B1 SPI mode
Comparator_E1 input 5
P6.3/
UCB1CLK/
C1.4
77
B9
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Clock signal input – eUSCI_B1 SPI slave mode
Clock signal output – eUSCI_B1 SPI master mode
Comparator_E1 input 4
P6.4/
UCB1SIMO/UCB1SDA/
C1.3
78
A8
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Slave in, master out – eUSCI_B1 SPI mode
I2C data – eUSCI_B1 I2C mode
Comparator_E1 input 3
P6.5/
UCB1SOMI/UCB1SCL/
C1.2
79
A7
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt and wake-up capability
Slave out, master in – eUSCI_B1 SPI mode
I2C clock – eUSCI_B1 I2C mode
Comparator_E1 input 2
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt, wake-up and glitch filtering
capability
TA2 CCR3 capture: CCI3A input, compare: Out3
Slave in, master out – eUSCI_B3 SPI mode
I2C data – eUSCI_B3 I2C mode
Comparator_E1 input 1
P6.6/
TA2.3/
UCB3SIMO/UCB3SDA/
C1.1
80
B8
49
Terminal Configuration and Functions
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
13
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 4-1. Signal Descriptions (continued)
TERMINAL
NAME
NO. (2)
PZ
ZXH
I/O (1)
DESCRIPTION
RGC
General-purpose digital I/O with port interrupt, wake-up and glitch filtering
capability
TA2 CCR4 capture: CCI4A input, compare: Out4
Slave out, master in – eUSCI_B3 SPI mode
I2C clock – eUSCI_B3 I2C mode
Comparator_E1 input 0
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P6.7/
TA2.4/
UCB3SOMI/UCB3SCL/
C1.0
81
B7
50
DVSS3
82
C7
51
RSTn/
NMI
83
B6
52
AVSS2
84
D6
53
PJ.2/
HFXOUT
85
A6
54
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Output for high-frequency crystal oscillator HFXT
PJ.3/
HFXIN
86
A5
55
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Input for high-frequency crystal oscillator HFXT
AVCC2
87
D5
56
P7.0/
PM_SMCLK/
PM_DMAE0
88
B5
57
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
SMCLK clock output
DMA external trigger input
P7.1/
PM_C0OUT/
PM_TA0CLK
89
C5
58
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Comparator_E0 output
TA0 input clock
P7.2/
PM_C1OUT/
PM_TA1CLK
90
B4
59
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Comparator_E1 output
TA1 input clock
P7.3/
PM_TA0.0
91
A4
60
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
TA0 CCR0 capture: CCI0A input, compare: Out0
PJ.4/
TDI/
ADC14CLK
92
B3
61
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
JTAG test data input
ADC14 clock output
PJ.5/
TDO/
SWO
93
A3
62
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
JTAG test data output
Serial wire trace output
SWDIOTMS
94
B2
63
I/O
Serial wire data input/output (SWDIO)/JTAG test mode select (TMS)
SWCLKTCK
95
A2
64
I
P9.4/
UCA3STE
96
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Slave transmit enable – eUSCI_A3 SPI mode
P9.5/
UCA3CLK
97
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Clock signal input – eUSCI_A3 SPI slave mode
Clock signal output – eUSCI_A3 SPI master mode
P9.6/
UCA3RXD/UCA3SOMI
98
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Receive data – eUSCI_A3 UART mode
Slave out, master in – eUSCI_A3 SPI mode
P9.7/
UCA3TXD/UCA3SIMO
99
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Transmit data – eUSCI_A3 UART mode
Slave in, master out – eUSCI_A3 SPI mode
P10.0/
UCB3STE
100
N/A
N/A
I/O
General-purpose digital I/O
Slave transmit enable – eUSCI_B3 SPI mode
QFN Pad
N/A
N/A
Pad
14
Terminal Configuration and Functions
I/O
Digital ground supply
I
External reset (active low)
External nonmaskable interrupt
Analog ground supply
Analog power supply
Serial wire clock input (SWCLK)/JTAG clock input (TCK)
QFN package exposed thermal pad. Connection to VSS is recommended.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
5 Specifications
5.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings
(1)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
Voltage applied at DVCC and AVCC pins to VSS
Voltage difference between DVCC and AVCC pins
Voltage applied to any pin
MIN
MAX
UNIT
–0.3
4.17
V
±0.3
V
–0.3
VCC + 0.3 V
(4.17 V MAX)
V
(2)
(3)
Diode current at any device pin
Storage temperature, Tstg
(4)
–40
Maximum junction temperature, TJ
(2)
(3)
(4)
mA
125
°C
95
°C
Stresses beyond those listed under Absolute Maximum Ratings may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings
only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under Recommended Operating
Conditions is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.
Voltage differences between DVCC and AVCC exceeding the specified limits may cause malfunction of the device.
All voltages referenced to VSS.
Higher temperature may be applied during board soldering according to the current JEDEC J-STD-020 specification with peak reflow
temperatures not higher than classified on the device label on the shipping boxes or reels.
5.2
ESD Ratings
VALUE
V(ESD)
(1)
(2)
Electrostatic discharge
Human-body model (HBM), per ANSI/ESDA/JEDEC JS-001 (1)
±1000
Charged-device model (CDM), per JEDEC specification JESD22-C101 (2)
±250
UNIT
V
JEDEC document JEP155 states that 500-V HBM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process. Pins listed as
±1000 V may actually have higher performance.
JEDEC document JEP157 states that 250-V CDM allows safe manufacturing with a standard ESD control process. Pins listed as ±250 V
may actually have higher performance.
5.3
Recommended Operating Conditions
TYP data are based on VCC = 3.0 V, TA = 25°C (unless otherwise noted)
MIN
Supply voltage range at all DVCC and
AVCC pins (1) (2) (3)
VCC
1.65
3.7
Normal operation, Flash not active (with
internal VCC supervision)
1.62
3.7
Normal operation, Flash active (with
internal VCC supervision)
1.71
3.7
Normal operation, Flash active (without
internal VCC supervision)
1.62
3.7
Supply voltage on all DVSS and AVSS pins
Inrush current into the VCC pins (4)
fMCLK
Frequency of the CPU and AHB clock in the system (5)
TA
Operating free-air temperature
TJ
Operating junction temperature
–40
(3)
(4)
(5)
UNIT
V
IINRUSH
(2)
MAX
At power-up (with internal VCC
supervision)
VSS
(1)
NOM
0
V
100
mA
0
48
MHz
–40
85
°C
95
°C
TI recommends powering AVCC and DVCC from the same source. A maximum difference of ±0.1 V between AVCC and DVCC can be
tolerated during power up and operation. Refer to section Section 5.4 for decoupling capacitor recommendations.
Supply voltage must not change faster than TBD. Faster changes can cause the VCCDET to trigger a reset even within the
recommended supply voltage range.
Modules may have a different supply voltage range specification. See the specification of the respective module in this data sheet.
Does not include I/O currents (driven by application requirements)
Operating frequency may require the flash to be accessed with wait states. Refer to Section 5.8 for further details
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
15
PRODUCT PREVIEW
(1)
±2
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Recommended External Components (1)
5.4
CDVCC
Capacitor on DVCC pin
CVCORE
(2) (3)
MIN
TYP
For DC-DC operation (4)
3.3
4.7
For LDO-only operation
3.3
4.7
1.54
4.7
9
µF
70
100
9000
nF
For DC-DC operation, including
capacitor tolerance
Capacitor on VCORE pin
For LDO-only operation, including
capacitor tolerance
MAX
UNIT
µF
CAVCC
Capacitor on AVCC pin
3.3
4.7
LVSW
Inductor between VSW and VCORE pins for DC-DC
3.3
4.7
13
µH
RLVSW-DCR
Allowed DCR for LVSW
150
350
mΩ
ISAT-LVSW
LVSW saturation current
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
5.5
µF
700
mA
For optimum performance, select the component value to match the typical value given in the table.
Refer to the section on board guidelines for further details on component selection, placement as well as related PCB design guidelines.
Tolerance of the capacitance/inductance values should be taken into account when choosing a component, in order to ensure that the
Min/Max ranges are never exceeded
CDVCC should not be smaller than CVCORE
Operating Mode VCC Ranges
over operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
OPERATING MODE
(1) (2)
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
MAX
UNIT
AM_LDO_VCORE0
AM_LF_VCORE0
LPM0_LDO_VCORE0
LPM0_LF_VCORE0
LPM3_VCORE0
LPM4_VCORE0
LPM3.5
LDO active, SVSMH enabled, Flash not
active
1.62
3.7
LDO active, SVSMH enabled, Flash active
1.71
3.7
LDO active, SVSMH disabled, Flash active
1.62
3.7
LDO active, SVSMH enabled, Flash active
1.71
3.7
VCC_LDO_VCORE1
AM_LDO_VCORE1 (1) (2)
AM_LF_VCORE1
LPM0_LDO_VCORE1
LPM0_LF_VCORE1
LPM3_VCORE1
LPM4_VCORE1
LDO active, SVSMH disabled, Flash active
1.62
3.7
VCC_DCDC_VCORE0
AM_DCDC_VCORE0 (3) (4)
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE0
DC-DC active, SVSMH enabled or disabled
2.18
3.7
V
VCC_DCDC_VCORE1
AM_DCDC_VCORE1 (3) (4)
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE1
DC-DC active, SVSMH enabled or disabled
2.18
3.7
V
LDO disabled, SVSMH enabled or disabled
1.62
3.7
V
VCC_LDO_VCORE0
VCC_VCORE_OFF
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
16
LPM4.5
(5)
V
V
LPM0 mode associated with each active mode will have a similar VCC range restriction.
Flash remains active only in active modes and LPM0 modes.
Low frequency active, Low frequency LPM0, LPM3, LPM4, and LPM3.5 modes are based on LDO only.
When VCC falls below the specified Min value, the DC-DC operation will switch to LDO automatically, as long as the VCC drop is slower
than the rate that is reliably detected. Refer to <ref> for more details.
Core voltage is switched off in LPM4.5 mode.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Operating Mode CPU Frequency Ranges (1)
5.6
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
OPERATING MODE
DESCRIPTION
fMCLK
MIN
MAX
UNIT
fAM_LDO_VCORE0
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Medium-performance mode with LDO as the active
regulator
0
24
MHz
fAM_LDO_VCORE1
AM_LDO_VCORE1
High-performance mode with LDO as the active
regulator
0
48
MHz
fAM_DCDC_VCORE0
AM_DCDC_VCORE0
Medium-performance mode with DC-DC as the active
regulator
0
24
MHz
fAM_DCDC_VCORE1
AM_DCDC_VCORE1
High-performance mode with DC-DC as the active
regulator
0
48
MHz
fAM_LF_VCORE0
AM_LF_VCORE0
Low-frequency low-leakage mode with LDO as the
active regulator
0
128
kHz
fAM_LF_VCORE1
AM_LF_VCORE1
Low-frequency low-leakage mode with LDO as the
active regulator
0
128
kHz
MIN
MAX
UNIT
Peripheral frequency range in LDO or DC-DC
based active or LPM0 modes for VCORE0
0
12
MHz
Peripheral frequency range in LDO or DC-DC
based active or LPM0 modes for VCORE1
0
24
MHz
Peripheral frequency range in low-frequency
active or low frequency LPM0 modes for
VCORE0 and VCORE1
0
128
kHz
LPM3_VCORE1
Peripheral frequency in LPM3 mode for VCORE0
and VCORE1
0
32.768
kHz
LPM3.5
Peripheral frequency in LPM3.5 mode
0
32.768
kHz
(1)
DMA can be operated at the same frequency as CPU.
5.7
Operating Mode Peripheral Frequency Ranges
PARAMETER
OPERATING MODE
DESCRIPTION
PRODUCT PREVIEW
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
AM_LDO_VCORE0
fAM_LPM0_VCORE0
AM_DCDC_VCORE0
LPM0_LDO_VCORE0
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE0
AM_LDO_VCORE1
fAM_LPM0_VCORE1
AM_DCDC_VCORE1
LPM0_LDO_VCORE1
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE1
AM_LF_VCORE0
fAM_LPM0_LF
AM_LF_VCORE1
LPM0_LF_VCORE0
LPM0_LF_VCORE1
fLPM3
(1)
fLPM3.5
(1)
(1)
LPM3_VCORE0
Only RTC and WDT can be active.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
17
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
5.8
www.ti.com
Operating Mode Execution Frequency vs Flash Wait-State Requirements
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
NUMBER OF
FLASH WAIT
STATES
FLASH READ
MODE
fMAX_NRM_FLWAIT0
0
fMAX_NRM_FLWAIT1
PARAMETER
MAXIMUM SUPPORTED MCLK FREQUENCY (1) ,
(2)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
AM_LDO_VCORE0,
AM_DCDC_VCORE0
AM_LDO_VCORE1,
AM_DCDC_VCORE1
UNIT
Normal read
mode
12
16
MHz
1
Normal read
mode
24
32
MHz
fMAX_NRM_FLWAIT2
2
Normal read
mode
24
48
MHz
fMAX_ORM_FLWAIT0
0
Other read
modes (3)
6
8
MHz
fMAX_ORM_FLWAIT1
1
Other read
modes (3)
12
16
MHz
fMAX_ORM_FLWAIT2
2
Other read
modes (3)
18
24
MHz
fMAX_ORM_FLWAIT3
3
Other read
modes (3)
24
32
MHz
fMAX_ORM_FLWAIT4
4
Other read
modes (3)
24
40
MHz
fMAX_ORM_FLWAIT5
5
Other read
modes (3)
24
48
MHz
(1)
(2)
(3)
18
Violation of the maximum frequency limitation for a given wait-state configuration results in nondeterministic data or instruction fetches
from the flash memory.
In low-frequency active modes, the flash can always be accessed in zero wait-state because the maximum MCLK frequency is limited to
128 kHz.
Other read modes refer to Read Margin 0/1, Read Margin 0B/1B, Program Verify, Erase Verify, and Leakage Verify.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
5.9
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Current Consumption
Table 5-1. Current Consumption During Device Reset
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
VCC
TYP
MAX
540
1300
UNIT
2.2 V
IRESET
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) (2) (3)
3.0 V
µA
Device held in reset through RSTn/NMI pin.
Current measured into VCC.
All other input pins tied to 0 V or VCC. Outputs do not source or sync any current.
Table 5-2. Current Consumption in LDO-Based Active Modes
over recommended operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EXECUTION
MEMORY
VCC
MCLK =
8 MHz
TYP
IAM_LDO_VCORE0,Flash
(6) (7)
Flash
3.0 V
IAM_LDO_VCORE1,Flash
(6) (7)
Flash
3.0 V
MAX
MCLK =
16 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
24 MHz
TYP
MAX
3950
4700
MCLK =
32 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
40 MHz
TYP
MCLK =
48 MHz
MAX
TYP
MAX
7600
8500
UNIT
µA
µA
IAM_LDO_VCORE0,SRAM
(8)
SRAM
3.0 V
µA
IAM_LDO_VCORE1,SRAM
(8)
SRAM
3.0 V
µA
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
MCLK sourced by DCO.
Current measured into VCC.
All other input pins tied to 0 V or VCC. Outputs do not source or sync any current.
All SRAM banks kept active.
All peripherals are inactive.
Device executing the Dhrystone 2.1 algorithm. Code execution from Flash, stack and data in SRAM.
Flash configured to minimum wait states required to support operation at given frequency and core voltage level.
Device executing the Dhrystone 2.1 algorithm. Code execution from SRAM, stack and data in SRAM.
Table 5-3. Current Consumption in DC-DC-Based Active Modes
over recommended operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAMETER
EXECUTION
MEMORY
VCC
MCLK =
8 MHz
TYP
IAM_DCDC_VCORE0,Flash
(6) (7)
Flash
3.0 V
IAM_DCDC_VCORE1,Flash
(6) (7)
Flash
3.0 V
MAX
MCLK =
16 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
24 MHz
TYP
MAX
2200
2800
MCLK =
32 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
40 MHz
TYP
MCLK =
48 MHz
MAX
TYP
MAX
4600
5400
UNIT
µA
µA
IAM_DCDC_VCORE0,SRAM
(8)
SRAM
3.0 V
µA
IAM_DCDC_VCORE1,SRAM
(8)
SRAM
3.0 V
µA
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
MCLK sourced by DCO.
Current measured into VCC.
All other input pins tied to 0 V or VCC. Outputs do not source or sync any current.
All SRAM banks kept active.
All peripherals are inactive.
Device executing the Dhrystone 2.1 algorithm. Code execution from Flash, stack and data in SRAM.
Flash configured to minimum wait states required to support operation at given frequency and core voltage level.
Device executing the Dhrystone 2.1 algorithm. Code execution from SRAM, stack and data in SRAM.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
19
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-4. Current Consumption in Low-Frequency Active Modes
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
PARAMETER
IAM_LF_VCORE0,
Flash
IAM_LF_VCORE1,
Flash
IAM_LF_VCORE0,
SRAM
IAM_LF_VCORE1,
SRAM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
EXECUTION
MEMORY
(6) (7)
(8)
(8)
TYP
25°C
MAX
TYP
60°C
MAX
TYP
85°C
MAX
TYP
MAX
2.2 V
Flash
(6) (7)
–40°C
VCC
3.0 V
90
570
95
680
2.2 V
Flash
3.0 V
2.2 V
SRAM
μA
μA
μA
3.0 V
2.2 V
SRAM
UNIT
μA
3.0 V
Current measured into VCC.
All other input pins tied to 0 V or VCC. Outputs do not source or sync any current.
MCLK sourced by REFO at 128 kHz.
All peripherals are inactive.
SRAM banks 0,1 enabled for execution from flash and SRAM banks 0 to 3 enabled for execution from SRAM.
Flash configured to 0 wait states.
Device executing the Dhrystone 2.1 algorithm. Code execution from Flash, stack and data in SRAM.
Device executing the Dhrystone 2.1 algorithm. Code execution from SRAM, stack and data also in SRAM.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 5-5. Current Consumption in LDO-Based LPM0 Modes
over recommended operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
PARAMETER
VCC
MCLK =
8 MHz
TYP
ILPM0_LDO_VCORE0
ILPM0_LDO_VCORE1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
MAX
MCLK =
16 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
24 MHz
TYP
MAX
700
1350
MCLK =
32 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
40 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
48 MHz
TYP
2.2 V
3.0 V
UNIT
MAX
µA
2.2 V
3.0 V
1130
1900
µA
MCLK sourced by DCO.
Current measured into VCC.
All other input pins tied to 0 V or VCC. Outputs do not source or sync any current.
CPU is OFF, Flash or SRAM not being accessed.
All SRAM banks kept active.
All peripherals are inactive.
Table 5-6. Current Consumption in DC-DC-Based LPM0 Modes
over recommended operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
PARAMETER
VCC
MCLK =
8 MHz
TYP
ILPM0_DCDC_VCORE0
ILPM0_DCDC_VCORE1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
20
MAX
MCLK =
16 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
24 MHz
TYP
MAX
500
950
MCLK =
32 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
40 MHz
TYP
MAX
MCLK =
48 MHz
TYP
2.2 V
3.0 V
UNIT
MAX
µA
2.2 V
3.0 V
800
1350
µA
MCLK sourced by DCO.
Current measured into VCC.
All other input pins tied to 0 V or VCC. Outputs do not source or sync any current.
CPU is OFF, Flash or SRAM not being accessed.
All SRAM banks kept active.
All peripherals are inactive.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 5-7. Current Consumption in Low-Frequency LPM0 Modes
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
PARAMETER
VCC
25°C
MAX
TYP
60°C
MAX
TYP
85°C
MAX
TYP
MAX
2.2 V
ILPM0_LF_VCORE0
3.0 V
70
530
70
625
2.2 V
ILPM0_LF_VCORE1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
–40°C
TYP
3.0 V
UNIT
μA
μA
Current measured into VCC.
All other input pins tied to 0 V or VCC. Outputs do not source or sync any current.
MCLK sourced by REFO at 128 kHz.
All peripherals are inactive.
Bank-0 of SRAM kept active. Rest of the banks are powered down.
CPU is OFF, Flash or SRAM not being accessed.
Table 5-8. Current Consumption in LPM3, LPM4 Modes
PARAMETER
ILPM3_VCORE0_RTCLF
(7) (8)
ILPM3_VCORE0_RTCREFO (9) (8)
ILPM3_VCORE1_RTCLF (7) (8)
ILPM3_VCORE1_RTCREFO (9) (8)
ILPM4_VCORE0
(10)
ILPM4_VCORE1
(10)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
–40°C
VCC
TYP
25°C
MAX
TYP
60°C
MAX
TYP
(6)
85°C
MAX
TYP
MAX
2.2 V
3.0 V
0.85
17
1.35
18
1.16
24
1.67
25
2.2 V
3.0 V
2.2 V
3.0 V
2.2 V
3.0 V
2.2 V
UNIT
μA
PRODUCT PREVIEW
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
μA
μA
μA
μA
3.0 V
2.2 V
μA
3.0 V
Current measured into VCC.
All other input pins tied to 0 V or VCC. Outputs do not source or sync any current.
CPU is OFF, Flash powered down.
Bank-0 of SRAM retained, all other banks powered down.
Refer to Table 5-54 for details on additional current consumed for each extra Bank that is enabled for retention.
SVSMH and SVSL are disabled.
RTC sourced by LFXT. Effective load capacitance of LF crystal is 3.7 pF.
WDT module is disabled.
RTC sourced by REFO.
RTC and WDT modules disabled.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
21
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-9. Current Consumption in LPM3.5, LPM4.5 Modes
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1) (2)
PARAMETER
VCC
25°C
MAX
TYP
60°C
MAX
TYP
85°C
MAX
TYP
MAX
2.2 V
ILPM3.5_RTCLF (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
3.0 V
0.8
17
1.3
18
0.1
7
2.2 V
ILPM3.5_RTCREFO (3) (4) (8) (6) (7)
3.0 V
2.2 V
ILPM4.5 (9) (10)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
–40°C
TYP
3.0 V
UNIT
μA
μA
μA
Current measured into VCC.
All other input pins tied to 0 V or VCC. Outputs do not source or sync any current.
CPU and Flash are powered down.
Bank-0 of SRAM retained, all other banks powered down.
RTC sourced by LFXT. Effective load capacitance of LF crystal is 3.7 pF.
WDT module is disabled.
SVSMH and SVSL are disabled.
RTC sourced by REFO.
No core voltage. CPU, Flash and all banks of SRAM are powered down.
SVSMH is disabled.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 5-10. Current Consumption of Digital Peripherals
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
TYP
MAX
UNIT
ITIMER_A0
Timer_A0 configured as PWM timer with 50% duty cycle
TBD
TBD
µA/MHz
ITIMER32
Timer32 enabled
TBD
TBD
µA/MHz
IUART
eUSCI_A configured in UART mode.
TBD
TBD
µA/MHz
ISPI
eUSCI_A configured in SPI master mode
TBD
TBD
µA/MHz
II2C
eUSCI_B configured in I2C master mode
TBD
TBD
µA/MHz
IWDT_A
WDT_A configured in interval timer mode
TBD
TBD
µA/MHz
IRTC_C
RTC_C enabled and sourced from 32-kHz LFXT
TBD
TBD
nA
IAES256
AES256 active.
TBD
TBD
µA/MHz
ICRC32
CRC32 active.
TBD
TBD
µA/MHz
(1)
22
Measured with VCORE = 1.2 V.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
5.10 Timing and Switching Characteristics
5.10.1 Mode Transition Timing
Table 5-11. Active Mode Transition Latencies
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
FINAL OPERATING
MODE
TEST CONDITIONS
tOFF_AMLDO0,100 nF
Power Off
AM_LDO_VCORE0
tOFF_AMLDO0,4.7 µF
Power Off
tAMLDO0_AMLDO1
LATENCY
UNIT
TYP
MAX
From VCC reaching 1.65 V to start of
application code. CVCORE = 100 nF.
4.5
5.2
ms
AM_LDO_VCORE0
From VCC reaching 1.65 V to start of
application code. CVCORE = 4.7 µF.
4.7
5.8
ms
AM_LDO_VCORE0
AM_LDO_VCORE1
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE0
to AM_LDO_VCORE1. MCLK
frequency = 24 MHz.
285
340
µs
tAMLDO1_AMLDO0
AM_LDO_VCORE1
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE1
to AM_LDO_VCORE0. MCLK
frequency = 24 MHz.
4
5
µs
tAMLDO0_AMDCDC0
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE0
AM_DCDC_VCORE0 to AM_DCDC_VCORE0. MCLK
frequency = 24 MHz
15
32
µs
tAMDCDC0_AMLDO0
AM_DCDC_VCORE0
15
27
µs
tAMLDO1_AMDCDC1
AM_LDO_VCORE1
15
32
µs
15
27
µs
AM_LF_VCORE0
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE0
to AM_LF_VCORE0. All high
frequency clock sources (DCO,
HFXT, MODOSC) disabled. SELM =
2, REFO frequency = 128 kHz
115
125
µs
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from AM_LF_VCORE0 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0. All high
frequency clock sources (DCO,
HFXT, MODOSC) disabled. SELM =
2, REFO frequency = 128 kHz.
115
130
µs
AM_LF_VCORE1
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE1
to AM_LF_VCORE1. All high
frequency clock sources (DCO,
HFXT, MODOSC) disabled. SELM =
2, REFO frequency = 128 kHz.
110
115
µs
AM_LDO_VCORE1
Transition from AM_LF_VCORE1 to
AM_LDO_VCORE1. All high
frequency clock sources (DCO,
HFXT, MODOSC) disabled. SELM =
2, REFO frequency = 128 kHz.
110
120
µs
tAMDCDC1_AMLDO1
tAMLDO0_AMLF0
tAMLF0_AMLDO0
tAMLDO1_AMLF1
tAMLF1_AMLDO1
AM_DCDC_VCORE1
AM_LDO_VCORE0
AM_LF_VCORE0
AM_LDO_VCORE1
AM_LF_VCORE1
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from
AM_DCDC_VCORE0 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0. MCLK
frequency = 24 MHz
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE1
AM_DCDC_VCORE1 to AM_DCDC_VCORE1. MCLK
frequency = 48 MHz
AM_LDO_VCORE1
Transition from
AM_DCDC_VCORE1 to
AM_LDO_VCORE1. MCLK
frequency = 48 MHz
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
PRODUCT PREVIEW
ORIGINAL
OPERATING MODE
PARAMETER
23
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-12. LPM0 Mode Transition Latencies
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
tAMLDO0_LPM0LDO0
(1)
tLPM0LDO0_AMLDO0
(2)
tAMDCDC0_LPM0DCDC0
(1)
tLPM0DCDC0_AMDCDC0
(2)
tAMLF0_LPM0LF0
PRODUCT PREVIEW
tLPM0LF0_AMLF0
(1)
(2)
(1)
tLPM0LDO1_AMLDO1
(2)
tAMDCDC1_LPM0DCDC1
(1)
tLPM0DCDC1_AMDCDC1
(2)
tLPM0LF1_AMLF1
(1)
(2)
24
FINAL OPERATING
MODE
AM_LDO_VCORE0
LPM0_LDO_VCORE0
(1)
(2)
TEST CONDITIONS
LATENCY
TYP
Transition from
AM_LDO_VCORE0 to
LPM0_LDO_VCORE0
1
3
LPM0_LDO_VCORE0
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from
LPM0_LDO_VCORE0 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0
through I/O interrupt
AM_DCDC_VCORE0
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE0
Transition from
AM_DCDC_VCORE0 to
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE0
1
AM_DCDC_VCORE0
Transition from
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE0
to AM_DCDC_VCORE0
through I/O interrupt
3
LPM0_LF_VCORE0
Transition from
AM_LF_VCORE0 to
LPM0_LF_VCORE0, All
high frequency clock
sources (DCO, HFXT,
MODOSC) disabled
1
LPM0_LF_VCORE0
AM_LF_VCORE0
Transition from
LPM0_LF_VCORE0 to
AM_LF_VCORE0
through I/O interrupt, All
high frequency clock
sources (DCO, HFXT,
MODOSC) disabled
3
AM_LDO_VCORE1
LPM0_LDO_VCORE1
Transition from
AM_LDO_VCORE1 to
LPM0_LDO_VCORE1
1
3
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE0
AM_LF_VCORE0
tAMLDO1_LPM0LDO1
tAMLF1_LPM0LF1
ORIGINAL OPERATING
MODE
LPM0_LDO_VCORE1
AM_LDO_VCORE1
Transition from
LPM0_LDO_VCORE1 to
AM_LDO_VCORE1
through I/O interrupt
AM_DCDC_VCORE1
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE1
Transition from
AM_DCDC_VCORE1 to
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE1
1
AM_DCDC_VCORE1
Transition from
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE1
to AM_DCDC_VCORE1
through I/O interrupt
3
LPM0_LF_VCORE1
Transition from
AM_LF_VCORE1 to
LPM0_LF_VCORE1. All
high frequency clock
sources (DCO, HFXT,
MODOSC) disabled
1
AM_LF_VCORE1
Transition from
LPM0_LF_VCORE1 to
AM_LF_VCORE1
through I/O interrupt. All
high frequency clock
sources (DCO, HFXT,
MODOSC) disabled
3
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE1
AM_LF_VCORE1
LPM0_LF_VCORE1
MAX
UNIT
MCLK
cycles
4
MCLK
cycles
MCLK
cycles
4
MCLK
cycles
MCLK
cycles
4
MCLK
cycles
MCLK
cycles
4
MCLK
cycles
MCLK
cycles
4
MCLK
cycles
MCLK
cycles
4
MCLK
cycles
This is the latency between execution of WFI instruction by CPU to assertion of SLEEPING signal at CPU output.
This is the latency between I/O interrupt event to deassertion of SLEEPING signal at CPU output.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 5-13. LPM3, LPM4 Mode Transition Latencies
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
tAMLDO0_LPMx0
(1)
tLPMx0_AMLDO0_NORIO
tLPMx0_AMLDO0_GFLTIO
ORIGINAL
OPERATING MODE
AM_LDO_VCORE0
(2)
(2)
FINAL OPERATING
MODE
LPM3_LPM4_VCORE0
LPM3_LPM4_VCORE0
AM_LDO_VCORE0
LPM3_LPM4_VCORE0
AM_LDO_VCORE0
TEST CONDITIONS
LATENCY
TYP
MAX
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
16 MHz
TBD
TBD
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
24 MHz
22
24
Transition from LPM3 or
LPM4 at VCORE0 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0
through wake-up event
from nonglitch filter type
I/O.
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
16 MHz
TBD
TBD
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
24 MHz
10
15
Transition from LPM3 or
LPM4 at VCORE0 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0
through wake-up event
from glitch filter type I/O,
GLTFLT_EN = 1
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
16 MHz
TBD
TBD
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
24 MHz
10
16
Transition from
AM_LDO_VCORE0 to
LPM3 or LPM4 at
VCORE0.
UNIT
µs
µs
µs
tAMLDO1_LPMx1
(1)
AM_LDO_VCORE1
LPM3_LPM4_VCORE1
Transition from
AM_LDO_VCORE1 to
LPM3 or LPM4 at
VCORE1.
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
32 MHz
TBD
TBD
µs
tAMLDO1_LPMx1
(1)
AM_LDO_VCORE1
LPM3_LPM4_VCORE1
Transition from
AM_LDO_VCORE1 to
LPM3 or LPM4 at
VCORE1
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
48 MHz
21
23
µs
AM_LDO_VCORE1
Transition from LPM3 or
LPM4 at VCORE1 to
AM_LDO_VCORE1
through wake-up event
from nonglitch filter type
I/O.
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
32 MHz
TBD
TBD
µs
AM_LDO_VCORE1
Transition from LPM3 or
LPM4 at VCORE1 to
AM_LDO_VCORE1
through wake-up event
from nonglitch filter type
I/O.
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
48 MHz
10
15
µs
AM_LDO_VCORE1
Transition from LPM3 or
LPM4 at VCORE1 to
AM_LDO_VCORE1
through wake-up event
from glitch filter type I/O,
GLTFLT_EN = 1.
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
32 MHz
TBD
TBD
µs
AM_LDO_VCORE1
Transition from LPM3 or
LPM4 at VCORE1 to
AM_LDO_VCORE1
through wake-up event
from glitch filter type I/O,
GLTFLT_EN = 1
SELM = 3,
DCO frequency =
48 MHz
10
16
µs
tLPMx1_AMLDO1_NORIO
tLPMx1_AMLDO1_NORIO
tLPMx1_AMLDO1_GFLTIO
tLPMx1_AMLDO1_GFLTIO
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
LPM3_LPM4_VCORE1
LPM3_LPM4_VCORE1
LPM3_LPM4_VCORE1
LPM3_LPM4_VCORE1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
This is the latency from WFI instruction execution by CPU to LPM3 or LPM4 entry.
This is the latency from I/O wake-up event to MCLK clock start at device pin.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
25
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-14. LPM3.5, LPM4.5 Mode Transition Latencies
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
ORIGINAL OPERATING
MODE
FINAL OPERATING
MODE
(1)
AM_LDO_VCORE0
LPM3.5
AM_DCDC_VCORE0
tAMLDO0_LPM3.5
tAMDCDC0_LPM3.5
tAMLF0_LPM3.5
(1)
tAMLDO1_LPM3.5
(1)
tAMDCDC1_LPM3.5
tAMLF1_LPM3.5
(2)
tAMDCDC0_LPM4.5
(2)
(2)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
tAMLDO1_LPM4.5
(2)
tAMDCDC1_LPM4.5
tAMLF1_LPM4.5
(1)
(1)
tAMLDO0_LPM4.5
tAMLF0_LPM4.5
(1)
(2)
(2)
tLPM3.5_AMLDO0
(3)
TEST CONDITIONS
LATENCY
UNIT
TYP
MAX
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE0 to
LPM3.5
22
25
µs
LPM3.5
Transition from AM_DCDC_VCORE0 to
LPM3.5
34
47
µs
AM_LF_VCORE0
LPM3.5
Transition from AM_LF_VCORE0 to
LPM3.5
225
240
µs
AM_LDO_VCORE1
LPM3.5
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE1 to
LPM3.5
22
25
µs
AM_DCDC_VCORE1
LPM3.5
Transition from AM_DCDC_VCORE1 to
LPM3.5
32
45
µs
AM_LF_VCORE1
LPM3.5
Transition from AM_LF_VCORE1 to
LPM3.5
225
240
µs
AM_LDO_VCORE0
LPM4.5
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE0 to
LPM4.5
22
25
µs
AM_DCDC_VCORE0
LPM4.5
Transition from AM_DCDC_VCORE0 to
LPM4.5
32
45
µs
AM_LF_VCORE0
LPM4.5
Transition from AM_LF_VCORE0 to
LPM4.5
180
195
µs
AM_LDO_VCORE1
LPM4.5
Transition from AM_LDO_VCORE1 to
LPM4.5
22
25
µs
AM_DCDC_VCORE1
LPM4.5
Transition from AM_DCDC_VCORE1 to
LPM4.5
22
25
µs
AM_LF_VCORE1
LPM4.5
Transition from AM_LF_VCORE1 to
LPM4.5
180
195
µs
LPM3.5
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from LPM3.5 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0
0.9
0.95
ms
tLPM4.5_AMLDO0_SVSMON,100 nF
(3)
LPM4.5
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from LPM4.5 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0,
SVSMH enabled while in LPM4.5,
CVCORE = 100 nF
1
TBD
ms
tLPM4.5_AMLDO0_SVSMON,4.7 µF
(3)
LPM4.5
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from LPM4.5 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0,
SVSMH enabled while in LPM4.5,
CVCORE = 4.7 µF
TBD
TBD
ms
LPM4.5
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from LPM4.5 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0,
SVSMH disabled while in LPM4.5,
CVCORE = 100 nF
1.7
TBD
ms
LPM4.5
AM_LDO_VCORE0
Transition from LPM4.5 to
AM_LDO_VCORE0,
SVSMH disabled while in LPM4.5,
CVCORE = 4.7 µF
TBD
TBD
ms
tLPM4.5_AMLDO0_SVSMOFF,100 nF
(3)
tLPM4.5_AMLDO0_SVSMOFF,4.7 µF
(1)
(2)
(3)
26
(3)
This is the latency from WFI instruction execution by CPU to LPM3.5 mode entry.
This is the latency from WFI instruction execution by CPU to LPM4.5 mode entry.
This is the latency from I/O wake-up event to start of application code.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
5.10.2 Reset Timing
Table 5-15. Reset Recovery Latencies
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
(1)
TYP
MAX
UNIT
5
MCLK
cycles
Latency from release of hard reset to release of soft reset
25
MCLK
cycles
tPOR
Latency from release of device POR to release of hard reset
15
25
µs
tCOLDPWR,100 nF
Latency from a cold power-up condition to release of device
POR, CVCORE = 100 nF
410
1000
µs
tCOLDPWR,4.7 µF
Latency from a cold power-up condition to release of device
POR, CVCORE = 4.7 µF
530
1600
µs
tSOFT
Latency from release of soft reset to first CPU instruction fetch
tHARD
(1)
Refer to Section 6.7.1 for details on the various classes of resets on the device
Table 5-16. External Reset (RSTn) Recovery Latencies
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
TYP
MAX
tAMLDO0_RSTn, 16MHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
AM_LDO_VCORE0 mode with MCLK = 16 MHz,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
UNIT
TBD
4
ms
tAMLDO1_RSTn, 32MHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
AM_LDO_VCORE1 mode with MCLK = 32 MHz,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tAMLDO1_RSTn, 48MHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
AAM_LDO_VCORE1 mode with MCLK = 48 MHz,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tAMDCDC0_RSTn,
16MHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
AM_DCDC_VCORE0 mode with MCLK = 16 MHz,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tAMDCDC1_RSTn,
48MHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
AM_DCDC_VCORE1 mode with MCLK = 48 MHz,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tAMLF0_RSTn,
128kHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
AM_LF_VCORE0 mode with MCLK = 128 kHz from REFO,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tAMLF0_RSTn,
32kHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
AM_LF_VCORE0 mode with MCLK = 32 kHz from LFXT,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tAMLF1_RSTn,
128kHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
AM_LF_VCORE1 mode with MCLK = 128 kHz from REFO,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tLPM0LDO0_RSTn, 16MHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
LPM0_LDO_VCORE0 mode with MCLK = 16 MHz,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tLPM0LDO1_RSTn, 48MHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
LPM0_LDO_VCORE1 mode with MCLK = 48 MHz,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tLPM0DCDC0_RSTn, 16MHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE0 mode with MCLK = 16 MHz,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tLPM0DCDC1_RSTn, 48MHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE1 mode with MCLK = 48 MHz,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tLPM0LF0_RSTn,
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
LPM0_LF_VCORE0 mode with MCLK = 128 kHz from REFO,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
128kHz
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
27
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
External Reset (RSTn) Recovery Latencies (continued)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
TBD
4
ms
TBD
4
ms
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in LPM3 or LPM4
tLPM3_LPM4_VCORE0_RSTn modes at VCORE0,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in LPM3 or LPM4
tLPM3_LPM4_VCORE1_RSTn modes at VCORE1,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tLPM3.5_RSTn
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in LPM3.5 mode,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tLPM4.5_RSTn
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in LPM4.5 mode,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
TBD
4
ms
tLPM0LF0_RSTn,
32kHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
LPM0_LF_VCORE0 mode with MCLK = 32 kHz from LFXT,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
tLPM0LF1_RSTn,
128kHz
External reset applied on RSTn pin while the device is in
LPM0_LF_VCORE1 mode with MCLK = 128 kHz from REFO,
The latency is from release of external reset to start of application code
UNIT
5.10.3 Clock Specifications
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 5-17. Low-Frequency Crystal Oscillator, LFXT, Recommended Operating Conditions
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
16
40
65
kΩ
Capacitance from LFXT input to ground and
from LFXT output to ground (1)
7.4
12
24
pF
CSHUNT
Crystal shunt capacitance
0.6
0.8
1.6
pF
Cm
Crystal motional capacitance
1
2
10
fF
ESR
Crystal equivalent series resistance
CLFXT
(1)
28
fOSC = 32.768 kHz
UNIT
Does not include board parasitics. Package and board will add additional capacitance to CLFXT.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 5-18. Low-Frequency Crystal Oscillator, LFXT
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
IVCC,LFXT
fLFXT
Current consumption (1)
LFXT oscillator crystal frequency
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
fOSC = 32.768 kHz
LFXTBYPASS = 0, LFXTDRIVE = {0},
CL,eff = 3.7 pF
Typical ESR, CSHUNT
3.0 V
100
fOSC = 32.768 kHz
LFXTBYPASS = 0, LFXTDRIVE = {1},
CL,eff = 6 pF
Typical ESR, CSHUNT
3.0 V
200
fOSC = 32.768 kHz
LFXTBYPASS = 0, LFXTDRIVE = {2},
CL,eff = 9 pF,
Typical ESR, CSHUNT
3.0 V
300
fOSC = 32.768 kHz
LFXTBYPASS = 0, LFXTDRIVE = {3},
CL,eff = 12 pF,
Typical ESR, CSHUNT
3.0 V
500
LFXTBYPASS = 0 (2)
LFXT oscillator duty cycle
fLFXT,SW
LFXT oscillator logic-level squareLFXTBYPASS = 1 (3)
wave input frequency
DCLFXT,
LFXT oscillator logic-level squareLFXTBYPASS = 1
wave input duty cycle
OALFXT
CL,eff
fLFXT = 32.768 kHz
Oscillation allowance for
LF crystals (5)
30%
(4)
10
Oscillator fault frequency (9)
MAX
32.768
nA
kHz
50
TBD
LFXTBYPASS = 0, LFXTDRIVE =
{3},
fLFXT = 32.768 kHz, CL,eff = 12 pF
300
kΩ
1
fOSC = 32.768 kHz
LFXTBYPASS = 0, LFXTDRIVE = {3},
CL,eff = 12 pF
Typical ESR, CSHUNT
FCNTLF_EN = 0 (2)
kHz
70%
LFXTBYPASS = 0, LFXTDRIVE =
{1},
fLFXT = 32.768 kHz, CL,eff = 6 pF
fOSC = 32.768 kHz
LFXTBYPASS = 0, LFXTDRIVE = {0},
CL,eff = 3.7 pF
Typical ESR, CSHUNT
FCNTLF_EN = 0 (2)
UNIT
70%
30%
Integrated effective load
capacitance (6) (7)
tSTART,LFXT Start-up time (8)
fFault,LFXT
TYP
32.768
(2)
DCLFXT
SW
MIN
pF
0.6
3.0 V
(10)
s
2
1
8
kHz
(1)
(2)
(3)
Total current measured on both AVCC and DVCC supplies.
Measured at ACLK pin.
When LFXTBYPASS is set, LFXT circuits are automatically powered down. Input signal is a digital square wave with parametrics
defined in the Schmitt-trigger Inputs section of this datasheet. Duty cycle requirements are defined by DCLFXT, SW.
(4) Maximum frequency of operation of the entire device cannot be exceeded.
(5) Oscillation allowance is based on a safety factor of 5 for recommended crystals. The oscillation allowance is a function of the
LFXTDRIVE settings and the effective load. In general, comparable oscillator allowance can be achieved based on the following
guidelines, but should be evaluated based on the actual crystal selected for the application:
• For LFXTDRIVE = {0}, CL,eff = 3.7 pF.
• For LFXTDRIVE = {1}, 6 pF ≤ CL,eff ≤ 9 pF.
• For LFXTDRIVE = {2}, 6 pF ≤ CL,eff ≤ 10 pF.
• For LFXTDRIVE = {3}, 6 pF ≤ CL,eff ≤ 12 pF.
(6) Includes parasitic bond and package capacitance (approximately 2 pF per pin).
(7) Requires external capacitors at both terminals. Values are specified by crystal manufacturers. Recommended values supported are
3.7 pF, 6 pF, 9 pF, and 12 pF. Maximum shunt capacitance of 1.6 pF. Because the PCB adds additional capacitance, it must be
considered, and TI recommends verifying proper oscillator performance.
(8) Does not include programmable startup counter.
(9) Frequencies above the MAX specification do not set the fault flag. Frequencies in between the MIN and MAX specification may set the
flag. A static condition or stuck at fault condition will set the fault flag.
(10) Measured with logic-level input frequency but also applies to operation with crystals.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
29
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-19. High-Frequency Crystal Oscillator, HFXT, Recommended Operating Conditions
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
ESR
TEST CONDITIONS
Crystal Equivalent Series
Resistance
TYP
MAX
fOSC = 1 MHz to ≤ 4 MHz
MIN
75
150
fOSC = > 4 MHz to ≤ 8 MHz
75
150
fOSC = > 8 MHz to ≤ 16 MHz
40
80
fOSC = > 16 MHz to ≤ 24 MHz
30
60
fOSC = > 24 MHz to ≤ 32 MHz
20
40
fOSC = > 32 MHz to ≤ 48 MHz
UNIT
Ω
15
30
CHFXT
Capacitance from HFXT input to
ground and from HFXT output to
ground.
fOSC = 1 MHz to 48 MHz
28
32
36
pF
CSHUNT
Crystal shunt capacitance
fOSC = 1 MHz to 48 MHz
1
3
7
pF
Cm
Crystal motional capacitance
fOSC = 1 MHz to 48 MHz
3
7
30
fF
PRODUCT PREVIEW
30
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 5-20. High-Frequency Crystal Oscillator, HFXT
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
IDVCC,HFXT
fHFXT
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
40
fOSC = 4 MHz,
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 0
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
60
fOSC = 8 MHz,
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 1
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
120
fOSC = 16 MHz,
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 2
CL,eff = 16 pF
HFXT oscillator crystal current HF Typical ESR , CSHUNT
mode at typical ESR
fOSC = 24 MHz,
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 3
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
MAX
μA
3.0 V
260
330
fOSC = 40 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 5
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
460
fOSC = 48 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 6
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
530
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFFREQ = 0
(1)
1
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFFREQ = 1
(1)
4.01
8
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFFREQ = 2
(1)
8.01
16
HFXT oscillator crystal frequency,
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFFREQ = 3
crystal mode
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFFREQ = 4
(1)
16.01
24
(1)
24.01
32
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFFREQ = 5
(1)
32.01
40
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFFREQ = 6
(1)
40.01
48
HFXT oscillator duty cycle
Measured at MCLK or HSMCLK.
fHFXT = 1 MHz - 48 MHz
fHFXT,SW
HFXT oscillator logic-level
square-wave input frequency,
bypass mode
HFXTBYPASS = 1
UNIT
200
fOSC = 32 MHz,
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 4
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
DCHFXT
(1)
(2)
VCC
fOSC = 1 MHz,
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 0,
HFFREQ = 0
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
(2) (1)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
40%
0.8
4
50%
MHz
60%
48
MHz
Maximum frequency of operation of the entire device cannot be exceeded.
When HFXTBYPASS is set, HFXT circuits are automatically powered down. Input signal is a digital square wave with parametrics
defined in the Schmitt-trigger Inputs section of this datasheet. Duty cycle requirements are defined by DCHFXT, SW.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
31
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
High-Frequency Crystal Oscillator, HFXT (continued)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
DCHFXT,
SW
PRODUCT PREVIEW
OAHFXT
(3)
32
HFXT oscillator logic-level
square-wave input duty cycle
Oscillation allowance for
HFXT crystals (3)
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX
HFXTBYPASS = 1
External clock used as a direct source
to MCLK or HSMCLK with no divider
(DIVM = 0 or DIVHS = 0).
45%
55%
HFXTBYPASS = 1
External clock used as a direct source
to MCLK or HSMCLK with divider
(DIVM > 0 or DIVHS > 0) or not used
as a direct source to MCLK or
HSMCLK.
40%
60%
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE =
0, HFFREQ = 0
fHFXT,HF = 1 MHz, CL,eff = 16 pF
5000
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE =
1, HFFREQ = 0
fHFXT,HF = 4 MHz, CL,eff = 16 pF
1250
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE =
1, HFFREQ = 1
fHFXT,HF = 8 MHz, CL,eff = 16 pF
750
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE =
1, HFFREQ = 2
fHFXT,HF = 16 MHz, CL,eff = 16 pF
425
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE =
1, HFFREQ = 3
fHFXT,HF = 24 MHz, CL,eff = 16 pF
275
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE =
1, HFFREQ = 4
fHFXT,HF = 32 MHz, CL,eff = 16 pF
225
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE =
1, HFFREQ = 5
fHFXT,HF = 40 MHz, CL,eff = 16 pF
160
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE =
1, HFFREQ = 6
fHFXT,HF = 48 MHz, CL,eff = 16 pF
140
UNIT
Ω
Oscillation allowance is based on a safety factor of 5 for recommended crystals.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
High-Frequency Crystal Oscillator, HFXT (continued)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
TEST CONDITIONS
tSTART,HFXT Start-up time (4)
CL,eff
fFault,HFXT
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
VCC
MIN
3.57
fOSC = 4 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 0
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
FCNTHF_EN = 0
0.89
fOSC = 8 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 1
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
FCNTHF_EN = 0
0.66
fOSC = 16 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 2
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
FCNTHF_EN = 0
0.53
fOSC = 24 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 3
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
FCNTHF_EN = 0
MAX
UNIT
ms
3.0 V
470
fOSC = 32 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 4
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
FCNTHF_EN = 0
435
fOSC = 40 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 5
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
FCNTHF_EN = 0
425
fOSC = 48 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 1,
HFFREQ = 6
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
FCNTHF_EN = 0
420
µs
Integrated effective load
capacitance (5) (6)
Oscillator fault frequency
TYP
fOSC = 1 MHz
HFXTBYPASS = 0, HFXTDRIVE = 0,
HFFREQ = 0
CL,eff = 16 pF
Typical ESR , CSHUNT
FCNTHF_EN = 0
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
1
(7) (8)
400
pF
700
kHz
Does not include programable startup counter.
Includes parasitic bond and package capacitance (approximately 2 pF per pin).
Because the PCB adds additional capacitance, TI recommeds verifying the correct load by measuring the oscillator frequency through
MCLK or SMCLK. For a correct setup, the effective load capacitance should always match the specification of the crystal.
Requires external capacitors at both terminals. Values are specified by crystal manufacturers. Recommended values supported are
14 pF, 16 pF, and 18 pF. Maximum shunt capacitance of 7 pF.
Frequencies above the MAX specification do not set the fault flag. Frequencies in between the MIN and MAX might set the flag. A static
condition or stuck at fault condition will set the flag.
Measured with logic-level input frequency but also applies to operation with crystals.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
33
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-21. DCO
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
fRSEL0_CTR
fRSEL1_CTR
fRSEL2_CTR
fRSEL3_CTR
PRODUCT PREVIEW
fRSEL4_CTR
fRSEL5_CTR
dfDCO/dT
(1)
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC , TA
MIN
TYP
MAX
DCO frequency center
range 0 initial accuracy ,
with trimmed factory
settings
Internal resistor option
DCORSEL = 0, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
1.4925
1.5 1.5075
External resistor option
DCORSEL = 0, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
1.4925
1.5 1.5075
DCO frequency center
range 1 initial accuracy ,
with trimmed factory
settings
Internal resistor option
DCORSEL = 1, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
2.985
3
3.015
External resistor option
DCORSEL = 1, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
2.985
3
3.015
DCO frequency center
range 2 initial accuracy ,
with trimmed factory
settings
Internal resistor option
DCORSEL = 2, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
5.97
6
6.03
External resistor option
DCORSEL = 2, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
5.97
6
6.03
DCO frequency center
range 3 initial accuracy ,
with trimmed factory
settings
Internal resistor option
DCORSEL = 3, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
11.94
12
12.06
External resistor option
DCORSEL = 3, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
11.94
12
12.06
DCO frequency center
range 4 initial accuracy ,
with trimmed factory
settings
Internal resistor option
DCORSEL = 4, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
23.88
24
24.12
External resistor option
DCORSEL = 4, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
23.88
24
24.12
DCO frequency center
range 5 initial accuracy ,
with trimmed factory
settings
Internal resistor option
DCORSEL = 5, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
47.76
48
48.24
External resistor option
DCORSEL = 5, DCOTUNE = 0
3.0 V
25°C
47.76
48
48.24
Internal resistor option
At fixed voltage.
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–250
250
External resistor option (2)
At fixed voltage.
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–35
35
DCO frequency drift with
temperature
UNIT
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
MHz
ppm/°
C
dfDCO/dVCC
DCO frequency voltage
drift with voltage
At fixed temperature.
–40°C to 85 °C
–0.10
0.10
%/V
fRSEL0
DCO frequency range 0
DCORSEL = 0, DCOTUNE = value
TBD in the negative scale to value
TBD in the positive scale
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
0.98
2.7
MHz
fRSEL1
DCO frequency range 1
DCORSEL = 1, DCOTUNE = value
TBD in the negative scale to value
TBD in the positive scale
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
1.96
5.4
MHz
fRSEL2
DCO frequency range 2
DCORSEL = 2, DCOTUNE = value
TBD in the negative scale to value
TBD in the positive scale
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
3.92
10.8
MHz
fRSEL3
DCO frequency range 3
DCORSEL = 3, DCOTUNE = value
TBD in the negative scale to value
TBD in the positive scale
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
7.84
21.6
MHz
fRSEL4
DCO frequency range 4
DCORSEL = 4, DCOTUNE = value
TBD in the negative scale to value
TBD in the positive scale
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
15.68
43.2
MHz
fRSEL5
DCO frequency range 5
DCORSEL = 5, DCOTUNE = value
TBD in the negative scale to value
TBD in the positive scale
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
31.36
86.5
MHz
fDCO_DC
Duty cycle
No external divide, all DCO settings
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
48%
tDCO_JITTER
DCO jitter
TDCO_STEP
Step size
(1)
(2)
34
Step size of the DCO.
50%
52%
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
120
200
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
0.2%
ps
Average calculated using the box method, (fDCO_MAX - fDCO_MIN) / (TMAX - TMIN).
Does not include temperature coefficient of external resistor.
The recommended value of External Resistor at DCOR pin: 91kΩ, 0.1%, ±25 ppm/℃.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
DCO (continued)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC , TA
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
DCO settling from worst
case DCORSELn to
DCORSELm
DCO settled to within 0.5% of steady
state frequency
See Figure 5-1.
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
5
μs
DCO settling LSB change
of DCOTUNE within any
DCORSEL setting
DCO settled to within 0.5% of steady
state frequency
See Figure 5-1.
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
2.2
μs
tDCO_SETTLE_TUNE
DCO settling worst case
DCOTUNEn to
DCOTUNEm within any
DCORSEL setting
DCO settled to within 0.5% of steady
state frequency
See Figure 5-1.
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
5
μs
DCOOVERSHOOT
DCO overshoot
Worst case DCO frequency change
See Figure 5-1.
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
tSTART
DCO startup time (3)
DCO settled to within 0.5% of steady
state frequency.
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–40°C to 85°C
tDCO_SETTLE_RANG
E
tDCO_SETTLE_TUNE_
LSB
(3)
–10%
5%
μs
5
The maximum parasitic capacitance at the DCO External Resistance pin (DCOR) should not exceed 5pF to guarantee the specified
DCO startup time.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
fDCO
DCOOVERSHOOT
± 0.5% of steady state
t
DCOOVERSHOOT
DCOSETTLE_RANGE
DCOSETTLE_TUNE_LSB
DCOSETTLE_TUNE
Figure 5-1. DCO Settling
Table 5-22. DCO Overall Tolerance
over operating free-air temperature range (unless otherwise noted)
RESISTOR OPTION
Internal resistor
External resistor
with 25-ppm TCR
TEMPERATURE
CHANGE
TEMPERATURE
DRIFT (%)
VOLTAGE
CHANGE
VOLTAGE DRIFT
(%)
OVERALL DRIFT
(%)
OVERALL
ACCURACY (%)
–40°C to 85 °C
±3.125
1.62 V to 3.7 V
±0.2
±3.325
±3.825
0°C
0
1.62 V to 3.7 V
±0.2
±0.2
±0.7
–40°C to 85 °C
±3.125
0V
0
±3.125
±3.625
–40°C to 85 °C
±0.438
1.62 V to 3.7 V
±0.2
±0.638
±1.138
0°C
0
1.62 V to 3.7 V
±0.2
±0.2
±0.7
–40°C to 85 °C
±0.438
0V
0
±0.438
±0.938
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
35
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-23. Internal Very-Low-Power Low-Frequency Oscillator (VLO)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
Current consumption (1)
IVLO
VCC
fVLO
VLO frequency
(2)
dfVLO/dT
VLO frequency temperature drift (3)
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
dfVLO/dVCC VLO frequency supply voltage drift (4)
DCVLO
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
MIN
TYP
1.62 V to 3.7 V
(2)
Duty cycle
1.62 V to 3.7 V
1.62 V to 3.7 V
MAX
100
6
9.4
nA
14
0.5
50%
kHz
%/°C
4
40%
UNIT
%/V
60%
Current measured on DVCC supply
Measured at ACLK pin
Calculated using the box method: (MAX(–40°C to 85°C) – MIN(–40°C to 85°C)) / MIN(–40°C to 85°C) / (85°C – (–40°C))
Calculated using the box method: (MAX(1.62 V to 3.7 V) – MIN(1.62 V to 3.7 V)) / MIN(1.62 V to 3.7 V) / (3.7 V – 1.62 V)
Table 5-24. Internal Reference, Low-Frequency Oscillator (REFO)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
REFO current consumption (1)
IREFO
PRODUCT PREVIEW
REFO frequency calibrated
fREFO
REFO absolute tolerance calibrated
VCC
MIN
TYP
REFOFSEL = 0
1.62 V to 3.7 V
0.6
REFOFSEL = 1
1.62 V to 3.7 V
1
REFOFSEL = 0 (2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
32.768
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
128
REFOFSEL = 1
MAX
µA
kHz
Full temperature range
REFOFSEL = 0 (2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–3%
3%
Full temperature range
REFOFSEL = 1 (2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
–6%
6%
–1.5%
1.5%
TA = 25°C
REFOFSEL = 0,1 (2)
3V
UNIT
dfREFO/dT
REFO frequency temperature drift (3)
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
0.01
%/°C
dfREFO/dVCC
REFO frequency supply voltage
drift (4)
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
1.0
%/V
DCREFO
REFO duty cycle
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
40%
50%
60%
Total current measured on both AVCC and DVCC supplies.
Measured at ACLK pin
Calculated using the box method: (MAX(–40°C to 85°C) – MIN(–40°C to 85°C)) / MIN(–40°C to 85°C) / (85°C – (–40°C))
Calculated using the box method: (MAX(1.62 V to 3.7 V) – MIN(1.62 V to 3.7 V)) / MIN(1.62 V to 3.7 V) / (3.7 V – 1.62 V)
Table 5-25. Module Oscillator (MODOSC)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
IMODOSC
TEST CONDITIONS
Current consumption (1)
VCC
MIN
1.62 V to 3.7 V
TYP
MAX
UNIT
μA
50
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7
V
fMODOSC
MODOSC frequency
dfMODOSC/dT
MODOSC frequency temperature
drift (3)
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
0.017
%/℃
dfMODOSC/dV
CC
MODOSC frequency supply voltage
drift (4)
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
0.36
%/V
DCMODOSC
Duty cycle
(2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
36
23
40%
25
50%
27
MHz
60%
Total current measured on both AVCC and DVCC supplies.
Measured at SMCLK pin with divide by 2 setting for MODOSC clock.
Calculated using the box method: (MAX(–40°C to 85°C) – MIN(–40°C to 85°C)) / MIN(–40°C to 85°C) / (85°C – (–40°C))
Calculated using the box method: (MAX(1.62V to 3.7V) – MIN(1.62V to 3.7V)) / MIN(1.62V to 3.7V) / (3.7V – 1.62V)
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 5-26. System Oscillator (SYSOSC)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
ISYSOSC
Current consumption (1)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
fSYSOSC
SYSOSC frequency
1.62 V to 3.7 V
dfSYSOSC/ dT
SYSOSC frequency temperature
drift (2)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
0.03
%/℃
dfSYSOSC/
dVCC
SYSOSC frequency supply voltage
drift (3)
1.62 V to 3.7 V
0.6
%/V
DCSYSOSC
Duty cycle
1.62 V to 3.7 V
(1)
(2)
(3)
μA
25
4.25
40%
5.0
50%
5.75
MHz
60%
Total current measured on both AVCC and DVCC supplies.
Calculated using the box method: (MAX(–40°C to 85°C) – MIN(–40°C to 85°C)) / MIN(–40°C to 85°C) / (85°C – (–40°C))
Calculated using the box method: (MAX(1.62 V to 3.7 V) – MIN(1.62 V to 3.7 V)) / MIN(1.62 V to 3.7 V) / (3.7 V – 1.62 V)
(1)
CURRENT
RATING
TEMPERATURE
RATING
140 mΩ ± 25%
1100 mA
–55°C to +125°C
230 mΩ ± 25%
800 mA
–55°C to +125°C
1008
180 mΩ ± 25%
800 mA
–55°C to +125°C
±20%
1008
398 mΩ max
890 mA
–40°C to +105°C
±20%
1008
532 mΩ max
760 mA
–40°C to +105°C
±20%
1008
588 mΩ max
800 mA
–40°C to +105°C
PART NAME
VALUE
TOLERANCE
FOOTPRINT
LQM2MPN4R7NG0
4.7 µH
±30%
0806
LQM21PN4R7NGR
4.7 µH
±30%
0806
LQM2HPN4R7MGC
4.7 µH
±20%
VLS252010ET4R7M
4.7 µH
VLS252010ET6R8M
6.8 µH
VLS252015ET100M
10 µH
DCR
(1)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 5-27. Recommended Parts for LVSW
Higher DCR will result in lower DC-DC efficiency
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
37
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
5.10.4 Voltage Regulators
Table 5-28. VCORE Regulator (LDO) Characteristics
PARAMETER
PRODUCT PREVIEW
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
VCORE0-HP
Static VCORE voltage Level 0
in active and LPM0 modes
Device power modes AM_LDO_VCORE0,
LPM0_LDO_VCORE0
1.07
1.2
1.27
V
VCORE1-HP
Static VCORE voltage Level 1
in active and LPM0 modes
Device power modes AM_LDO_VCORE1,
LPM0_LDO_VCORE1
1.25
1.4
1.48
V
VCORE0-LF
Static VCORE voltage Level 0
in low-frequency active and low Device power modes AM_LF_VCORE0
frequency LPM0 modes
1.07
1.2
1.27
V
VCORE1-LF
Static VCORE voltage Level 1
in low-frequency active and low Device power modes AM_LF_VCORE1
frequency LPM0 modes
1.25
1.4
1.48
V
VCORE0-LPM34
Static VCORE voltage Level 0
in LPM3 and LPM4 modes
Device power modes LPM3, LPM4
0.98
1.2
1.31
V
VCORE1-LPM34
Static VCORE voltage Level 1
in LPM3 and LPM4 modes
Device power modes LPM3, LPM4
1.14
1.4
1.52
V
VCORE0-LPM35
Static VCORE voltage Level 0
in LPM3.5 mode
Device power mode LPM3.5
0.98
1.2
1.31
V
IINRUSH-ST
Inrush current at startup
Device power-up
200
mA
IPEAK-LDO
Peak current drawn by LDO
from DVCC
Highest peak current expected during TBD
350
mA
TLPMLDO_RDY
Time taken by LPM LDO (LDO
in LPM3, LPM4, or LPM3.5) to
get ready after a cold powerup
or LPM4.5, before it may be
enabled. (1)
650
µs
ISC-coreLDO
Short circuit current limit for
core LDO
(1)
TEST CONDITIONS
Measured when output is shorted to ground
350
mA
If LPM LDO is attempted to be enabled before this time, the active mode LDO automatically remains ON at the expense of system
power to allow the SOC operations to continue smoothly.
Table 5-29. VCORE Regulator (DC-DC) Characteristics
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
DVCC-DCDC
Allowed DVCC range for DC-DC
operation
VCORE0-DCDC
Device power modes
Static VCORE voltage Level 0 in
AM_DCDC_VCORE0,
DC-DC high-performance modes
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE0
1.07
VCORE1-DCDC
Device power modes
Static VCORE voltage Level 1 in
AM_DCDC_VCORE1,
DC-DC high-performance modes
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE1
1.25
IPEAK-DCDC
Peak current drawn by DC-DC
from DVCC
ISC-DCDC
Short circuit current limit for DCDC
38
Specifications
TYP
2.0
Measured when output is shorted to
ground
MAX
UNIT
3.7
V
1.2
1.27
V
1.4
1.48
V
500
mA
700
mA
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 5-30. PSS, VCCDET
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
VVCC_VCCDET-
VCCDET power-down level
| dDVCC/dt | < 3 V/s (1)
- trip point with falling VCC
0.64
1.1
1.62
V
VVCC_VCCDET+
VCCDET power-up level trip point with rising VCC
0.70
1.165
1.65
V
VVCC_VCC_hys
VCCDET hysteresis
40
65
100
mV
(1)
TEST CONDITIONS
| dDVCC/dt | < 3 V/s (1)
The VCCDET levels are measured with a slow-changing supply. Faster slopes can result in different levels.
Table 5-31. PSS, SVSMH
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
VSVSMH+,ST
VSVSMH-,HP
VSVSMH+,HP
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
SVSMH leakage current
consumption, power down
SVSMHOFF = 1
0.05
15
SVSMH current consumption,
low-power mode
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1
300
500
SVSMH current consumption,
high-performance mode
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0
4.5
8
μA
SVSMH threshold level during
start up [(rising DVCC)
untrimmed (at initial powerup), DC (dDVCC/dt <
1V/s)
1.47
1.565
1.65
V
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 0,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
1.54
1.58
1.62
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 1,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
1.57
1.61
1.65
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 2,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
1.59
1.64
1.71
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 3,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.0
2.05
2.12
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 4,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.2
2.25
2.32
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 5,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.4
2.46
2.54
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 6,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.7
2.77
2.86
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 7,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.92
3.0
3.1
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 0,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
1.555
1.595
1.635
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 1,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
1.585
1.625
1.665
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 2,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
1.605
1.655
1.71
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 3,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.015
2.065
2.12
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 4,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.215
2.265
2.32
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 5,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.415
2.475
2.54
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 6,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.715
2.785
2.86
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, SVSMHTH = 7,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.935
3.015
3.1
SVSMH threshold level during
high-performance mode (falling
DVCC)
SVSMH threshold level; High
Performance Mode [rising
DVCC]
nA
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
PRODUCT PREVIEW
ISVSMH
TEST CONDITIONS
V
V
Specifications
39
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
PSS, SVSMH (continued)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
VSVSMH-,LP
VSVSMH_hys
PRODUCT PREVIEW
tPD,SVSMH
t(SVSMH)
(1)
40
SVSMH threshold level; Low
Power Mode [falling DVCC]
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1, SVSMHTH = 0,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
1.47
1.54
1.62
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1, SVSMHTH = 1,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
1.5
1.57
1.65
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1, SVSMHTH = 2,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
1.55
1.62
1.71
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1, SVSMHTH = 3,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2
2.09
2.18
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1, SVSMHTH = 4,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.2
2.3
2.4
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1, SVSMHTH = 5,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.4
2.51
2.62
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1, SVSMHTH = 6,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.7
2.82
2.94
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1, SVSMHTH = 7,
DC (dDVCC/dt < 1V/s) trimmed
2.87
3.0
3.13
SVSMH hysteresis
UNIT
V
15
mV
SVSH propagation delay, highperformance mode
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 0, very fast
dVDVCC/dt
2
10
SVSH propagation delay, lowpower mode
SVSMHOFF = 0, SVSMHLP = 1, very fast
dVDVCC/dt
15
100
SVSMH on or off delay time
SVSMHOFF = 1 → 0
SVSMHLP = 0 (1)
17
40
μs
μs
If the SVSMH is kept disabled in active mode and is enabled before entering a low-power mode of the device (LPM3, LPM4, LPM3.5, or
LPM4.5) care should be taken that sufficient time has elapsed since enabling of the module before entry into the device low-power
mode to allow for successful wakeup of SVSMH module as per the SVSMH on or off delay time specification. Otherwise, SVSMH may
trip, causing device to get a Reset & wakeup from the Low Power Mode.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 5-32. PSS, SVSL
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
ISVSL,leak
SVSL leakage current consumption,
power down
ISVSL-DVCC,LP
SVSL current consumption, low-power
mode, from DVCC
ISVSL-VCORE,LP
SVSL current consumption, low-power
mode, from VCORE
ISVSL-DVCC,HP
SVSL current consumption, highperformance mode, from DVCC
ISVSL-VCORE,HP
tPD,SVSL,
TYP
MAX
0.1
10
110
200
95
200
1.5
2
1.5
3
SVSLOFF = 0, SVSLLP = 1
UNIT
nA
nA
SVSLOFF = 0, SVSLLP = 0
µA
SVSL propagation delay, highperformance mode
SVSLOFF = 0, SVSLLP = 0,
very fast dVVCORE/dt
2
10
SVSL propagation delay, low-power
mode
SVSLOFF = 0, SVSLLP = 1,
very fast dVVCORE/dt
16
100
SVSL on or off delay time
SVSLOFF = 0 → 1, SVSLLP = 0
16
40
μs
μs
PRODUCT PREVIEW
t(SVSL)
AM
SVSL current consumption, highperformance mode, from VCORE
SVSLOFF = 1
MIN
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
41
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
5.10.5 Digital I/Os
Table 5-33. Digital Inputs (Applies to Both Normal and High-Drive I/Os)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX
2.2 V
0.99
1.65
3V
1.35
2.25
2.2 V
0.55
1.21
3V
0.75
1.65
2.2 V
0.32
0.84
3V
0.4
1.0
UNIT
PRODUCT PREVIEW
VIT+
Positive-going input threshold voltage
VIT–
Negative-going input threshold voltage
Vhys
Input voltage hysteresis (VIT+ – VIT–)
RPull
Pullup or pulldown resistor
For pullup: VIN = VSS
For pulldown: VIN = VCC
CI,dig
Input capacitance, digital only port pins
VIN = VSS or VCC
3
pF
CI,ana
Input capacitance, port pins shared with
analog functions
VIN = VSS or VCC
5
pF
Ilkg,ndio
Normal I/O high-impedance input leakage
current (refer also to and )
(1) (2)
2.2 V, 3 V
–20
+20
nA
Ilkg,hdio
High-drive I/O high-impedance input leakage
current (refer also to and )
(1) (2)
2.2 V, 3 V
–20
+20
nA
Ports with interrupt capability and
without glitch filter
2.2 V, 3 V
20
ns
Ports with interrupt capability and
with glitch filter but glitch filter
disabled (GLTFLT_EN = 0)
2.2 V, 3 V
20
ns
Ports with interrupt capability and
with glitch filter, Glitch filter enabled
(GLTFTL_EN = 1)
2.2 V, 3 V
2
µs
2.2 V, 3 V
2
µs
tint
tRST
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
42
External interrupt timing (external trigger
pulse duration to set interrupt flag) (3)
External reset pulse duration on RSTn pin (4)
20
35
50
V
V
V
kΩ
The input leakage current is measured with VSS or VCC applied to the corresponding pins, unless otherwise noted.
The input leakage of the digital port pins is measured individually. The port pin is selected for input and the pullup/pulldown resistor is
disabled.
An external signal sets the interrupt flag every time the minimum interrupt pulse duration tint is met. It may be set by trigger signals
shorter than tint.
Not applicable if RSTn/NMI pin configured as NMI.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 5-34. Digital Outputs, Normal I/Os
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
I(OHmax) = –1 mA (1)
VOH
2.2 V
I(OHmax) = –3 mA (2)
High-level output voltage
I(OHmax) = –2 mA (1)
3.0 V
I(OHmax) = –6 mA (2)
I(OLmax) = 1 mA (1)
VOL
2.2 V
I(OLmax) = 3 mA (2)
Low-level output voltage
I(OLmax) = 2 mA (1)
3.0 V
I(OLmax) = 6 mA (2)
Port output frequency (with RC
load) (3)
fPx.y
dPx.y
fPort_CLK
dPort_CLK
trise,dig
tfall,dig
trise,ana
tfall,ana
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
VCORE = 1.4 V, CL = 20 pF, RL
Port output duty cycle (with RC
Load)
VCORE = 1.4 V, CL = 20 pF, RL
Clock output frequency (3)
VCORE = 1.4 V, CL = 20 pF (5)
Clock output duty cycle
VCORE = 1.4 V, CL = 20 pF
Port output rise time, digital only
port pins
Port output fall time, digital only
port pins
Port output rise time, port pins
with shared analog functions
Port output fall time, port pins
with shared analog functions
CL = 20 pF
CL = 20 pF
CL = 20 pF
CL = 20 pF
(6)
(7)
(6)
(7)
(5)
(4) (5)
(4) (5)
MIN
MAX
VCC – 0.25
VCC
VCC – 0.60
VCC
VCC – 0.25
VCC
VCC – 0.60
VCC
VSS
VSS + 0.25
VSS
VSS + 0.60
VSS
VSS + 0.25
VSS
VSS + 0.60
1.62 V
20
2.2 V
24
3.0 V
24
1.62 V
40%
60%
2.2 V
40%
60%
3.0 V
45%
55%
1.62 V
20
2.2 V
24
3.0 V
24
1.62 V
40%
60%
2.2 V
40%
60%
3.0 V
45%
55%
UNIT
V
V
MHz
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
MHz
1.62 V
8
2.2 V
5
3.0 V
3
1.62 V
8
2.2 V
5
3.0 V
3
1.62 V
8
2.2 V
5
3.0 V
3
1.62 V
8
2.2 V
5
3.0 V
3
ns
ns
ns
ns
The maximum total current, I(OHmax) and I(OLmax), for all outputs combined should not exceed ±48 mA to hold the maximum voltage drop
specified.
The maximum total current, I(OHmax) and I(OLmax), for all outputs combined should not exceed ±100 mA to hold the maximum voltage
drop specified.
The port can output frequencies at least up to the specified limit - it might support higher frequencies.
A resistive divider with 2 × R1 and R1 = 3.2kΩ between VCC and VSS is used as load. The output is connected to the center tap of the
divider. CL = 20pF is connected to the output to VSS.
The output voltage reaches at least 20% and 80% VCC at the specified toggle frequency.
Measured between 20% of VCC to 80% of VCC.
Measured between 80% of VCC to 20% of VCC.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
43
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-35. Digital Outputs, High-Drive I/Os
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
I(OHmax) = –5 mA (1)
VOH
2.2 V
I(OHmax) = –15 mA (2)
High-level output voltage
I(OHmax) = –10 mA (1)
3.0 V
I(OHmax) = –20 mA (2)
I(OLmax) = 5 mA (1)
VOL
2.2 V
I(OLmax) = 15 mA (2)
Low-level output voltage
I(OLmax) = 10 mA (1)
3.0 V
I(OLmax) = 20 mA (2)
Port output frequency (with RC
load) (3)
fPx.y
Port output duty cycle (with RC
Load)
dPx.y
PRODUCT PREVIEW
fPort_CLK
dPort_CLK
trise
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Clock output duty cycle
Port output rise time
tfall
(1)
Clock output frequency (3)
Port output fall time
VCORE = 1.4 V, CL = 20 pF, RL
VCORE = 1.4 V, CL = 20 pF, RL
(4) (5)
(4) (5)
VCORE = 1.4 V, CL = 20 pF (5)
VCORE = 1.4 V, CL = 20 pF
CL = 20 pF
CL = 20 pF
(5)
(6)
(7)
MIN
MAX
VCC – 0.25
VCC
VCC – 0.60
VCC
VCC – 0.25
VCC
VCC – 0.30
VCC
VSS
VSS + 0.25
VSS
VSS + 0.60
VSS
VSS + 0.25
VSS
VSS + 0.30
1.62 V
24
2.2 V
24
3.0 V
24
1.62 V
40%
60%
2.2 V
45%
55%
3.0 V
45%
55%
1.62 V
24
2.2 V
24
3.0 V
24
1.62 V
40%
60%
2.2 V
45%
55%
3.0 V
45%
55%
UNIT
V
V
MHz
MHz
1.62 V
8
2.2 V
5
3.0 V
3
1.62 V
8
2.2 V
5
3.0 V
3
ns
ns
The maximum total current, I(OHmax) and I(OLmax), for all outputs combined should not exceed ±48 mA to hold the maximum voltage drop
specified.
The maximum total current, I(OHmax) and I(OLmax), for all outputs combined should not exceed ±100 mA to hold the maximum voltage
drop specified.
The port can output frequencies at least up to the specified limit - it might support higher frequencies.
A resistive divider with 2 × R1 and R1 = 3.2kΩ between VCC and VSS is used as load. The output is connected to the center tap of the
divider. CL = 20pF is connected to the output to VSS.
The output voltage reaches at least 20% and 80% VCC at the specified toggle frequency.
Measured between 20% of VCC to 80% of VCC.
Measured between 80% of VCC to 20% of VCC.
Table 5-36. Pin-Oscillator Frequency, Ports Px
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
foPx.y
(1)
44
Pin-Oscillator Frequency
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
Px.y, CL = 10 pF (1)
3.0 V
2000
kHz
(1)
3.0 V
1300
kHz
Px.y, CL = 20 pF
CL is the external load capacitance connected from the output to VSS and includes all parasitic effects such as PCB traces.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
5.10.6 14-Bit ADC
Table 5-37. 14-Bit ADC, Power Supply and Input Range Conditions
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
MIN
NOM
MAX
UNIT
Analog supply voltage
AVCC and DVCC are connected
together,
AVSS and DVSS are connected
together,
V(AVSS) = V(DVSS) = 0 V,
ADC14PWRMD = 2
1.62
3.7
V
AVCC
Analog supply voltage
AVCC and DVCC are connected
together,
AVSS and DVSS are connected
together,
V(AVSS) = V(DVSS) = 0 V,
ADC14PWRMD = 0
1.8
3.7
V
V(Ax)
Analog input voltage range (1)
All ADC14 analog input pins Ax
AVCC
V
AVCC
I(ADC14)
Operating supply current into
singleAVCC plus DVCC terminal (2)
ended mode
I(ADC14)
differential
mode
Operating supply current into
AVCC plus DVCC terminal (2)
0
fADC14CLK = 25 MHz, 1 Msps
(ADC14PWRMD = 0), ADC14ON = 1,
ADC14DIF = 0, ADC14VRSEL =
1110 (3), REFON = 0, ADC14SHT0x =
0, ADC14SHT1x = 0
3.0 V
375
TBD
2.2 V
355
TBD
fADC14CLK = 5 MHz, 200 ksps
(ADC14PWRMD = 2), ADC14ON = 1,
ADC14DIF = 0, ADC14VRSEL =
1110 (3), REFON = 0, ADC14SHT0x =
0, ADC14SHT1x = 0
3.0 V
175
TBD
2.2 V
170
TBD
fADC14CLK = 25 MHz, 1 Msps
(ADC14PWRMD = 0), ADC14ON = 1,
ADC14DIF = 1, ADC14VRSEL =
1110 (3), REFON = 0, ADC14SHT0x =
0, ADC14SHT1x = 0
3.0 V
535
TBD
2.2 V
495
TBD
fADC14CLK = 5 MHz, 200 ksps
(ADC14PWRMD = 2), ADC14ON = 1,
ADC14DIF = 1, ADC14VRSEL =
1110 (3), REFON = 0, ADC14SHT0x =
0, ADC14SHT1x = 0
3.0 V
215
TBD
2.2 V
210
TBD
Resolution
14
CI
Input capacitance into a single
terminal
10
RI
Input MUX ON-resistance
(1)
(2)
(3)
0 V ≤ V(Ax)≤ AVCC
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
µA
µA
bits
15
pF
1.8V - 3.7V
0.135
1
kΩ
1.62V - 1.8V
0.15
1.5
kΩ
The analog input voltage range must be within the selected reference voltage range VR+ to VR- for valid conversion results.
The internal reference supply current is not included in current consumption parameter I(ADC14).
VeREF- pin should be connected to onboard ground for ADC14VRSEL = 1110.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
45
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-38. 14-Bit ADC, Timing Parameters
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
fADC14CLK
TEST CONDITIONS
For specified performance of
ADC14 linearity parameters
TYP
25
200 ksps, ADC14PWRMD = 2
1.62 V to 3.7 V
5
ADC14RES = 11
16
ADC14RES = 10
14
ADC14RES = 01
11
ADC14RES = 00
9
Clock cycles for conversion
tADC14ON
Turnon settling time of the ADC
See
tSample
Sampling time (2)
RS = 200 Ω, CS = 10pF
(2)
MIN
1.8 V to 3.7 V
NCONVERT
(1)
VCC
1 Msps, ADC14PWRMD = 0
(1)
MAX
UNIT
MHz
cycles
100
0.215
ns
µs
The condition is that the error in a conversion started after tADC14ON is less than ±0.5 LSB. The reference and input signal are already
settled.
Sampling time should be at-least 4x 1/fADC14CLK.
Table 5-39. 14-Bit ADC, Linearity Parameters, LDO Operation
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
PRODUCT PREVIEW
SINAD
VCC
MIN
TYP
1Msps, ADC14DIF = 0, ADC14VRSEL = 1110 (1),
With single-ended input
2.5-V reference, 20-kHz input sine
1.8 V to 3.7 V
TBD
75
With differential input
1Msps, ADC14DIF = 1, ADC14VRSEL = 1110 (1),
2.5-V reference, 20-kHz input sine
1.8 V to 3.7 V
TBD
80
With single-ended input
1Msps, ADC14DIF = 0, ADC14VRSEL = 1110 (1),
2.5-V reference, 20-kHz input sine
1.8 V to 3.7 V
TBD
12.1
With differential input
1Msps, ADC14DIF = 1, ADC14VRSEL = 1110 (1),
2.5-V reference, 20-kHz input sine
1.8 V to 3.7 V
TBD
13
ENOB
TEST CONDITIONS
MAX
UNIT
dB
bit
1.45 V≤ VR+ - VR-≤ AVCC
–2.0
2.0
1.2 V < VR+ - VR-< 1.45
TBD
TBD
–0.99
1.0
EI
Integral linearity error
(INL)
ED
Differential linearity
error (DNL)
EO
Offset error
–0.7
±0.35
0.7
mV
EG
Gain error
–2.0
±1
2.0
LSB
ET
Total unadjusted error
–10
±TBD
10
LSB
(1)
46
LSB
LSB
VeREF- pin should be connected to onboard ground for ADC14VRSEL = 1110.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 5-40. 14-Bit ADC, Temperature Sensor and Built-In V1/2
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
VSENSOR
See
(1) (2)
ADC14ON = 1, ADC14TCMAP = 1,
TA = 0°C
TCSENSOR
See
(2)
ADC14ON = 1, ADC14TCMAP = 1
tSENSOR(sa
Sample time required if
ADCTCMAP = 1 and channel
MAX-1 is selected (3)
ADC14ON = 1, ADC14TCMAP = 1,
Error of conversion result ≤ 1 LSB
V1/2
AVCC voltage divider for
ADC14BATMAP = 1 on MAX
input channel
ADC14ON = 1, ADC14BATMAP = 1
tV 1/2
Sample time required if
ADC14BATMAP = 1 and channel
MAX is selected (4)
ADC14ON = 1, ADC14BMAP = 1
mple)
(sample)
(2)
TYP
MAX
730
mV
1.9
mV/°C
5
48%
UNIT
µs
50%
52%
1
µs
The temperature sensor offset can be as much as ±20°C. TI recommends a single-point calibration to minimize the offset error of the
built-in temperature sensor.
The TLV structure contains calibration values for 30°C ± 3°C and 85°C ± 3°C for each of the available reference voltage levels. The
sensor voltage can be computed as VSENSE = TCSENSOR × (Temperature,°C) + VSENSOR, where TCSENSOR and VSENSOR can be
computed from the calibration values for higher accuracy.
The typical equivalent impedance of the sensor is 250 kΩ. The sample time required includes the sensor-on time tSENSOR(on).
The on-time tV1/2(on) is included in the sampling time tV 1/2 (sample). No additional on time is needed.
Typical Temperate Sensor Voltage (V)
(3)
(4)
MIN
PRODUCT PREVIEW
(1)
VCC
-40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Ambient Temperature (°C)
Figure 5-2. Typical Temperature Sensor Voltage
Table 5-41. 14-Bit ADC, Internal Reference Buffers
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
IREF+
ton
(1)
Operating supply current into
AVCC terminal (1)
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
ADC ON, REFOUT = 0, ADC14PWRMD =
0, REFVSEL = {0, 1, 3}
TYP
MAX
3V
600
1000
ADC ON, REFOUT = 0, ADC14PWRMD =
2, REFVSEL = {0, 1, 3}
3V
200
360
ADC ON, REFOUT = 1, ADC14PWRMD =
2, REFVSEL = {0, 1, 3}
3V
560
870
Time to turn on
3V
MIN
5
UNIT
µA
µs
The internal reference current is supplied via terminal AVCC.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
47
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-42. 14-Bit ADC, External Reference
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
MAX
UNIT
VeREF+
Positive external reference voltage
input
VeREF+ > VeREF-
(1)
1.45
AVCC
V
VeREF-
Negative external reference voltage
VeREF+ > VeREFinput
(2)
0
AVCC –
1.45
V
(VeREF+ VeREF-)
Differential external reference
voltage input
(3)
1.45
AVCC
V
–45
45
uA
–9
9
µA
1.45 V ≤ VeREF+≤ VAVCC, VeREF- = 0 V,
fADC14CLK = 25 MHz, ADC14SHTx = 1h,
ADC14DIF = 1, Conversion rate 1Msps
–90
90
uA
1.45 V ≤ VeREF+≤ VAVCC, VeREF- = 0 V
fADC14CLK = 5 MHz, ADC14SHTx = 1h,
ADC14DIF = 1
Conversion rate 200ksps
–18
18
uA
IVeREF+
IVeREF-
Static input current single ended
input mode
IVeREF+
IVeREF-
Static input current differential input
mode
VeREF+ > VeREF-
1.45 V ≤ VeREF+≤ VAVCC, VeREF- = 0 V,
fADC14CLK = 25 MHz, ADC14SHTx = 1h,
ADC14DIF = 0, Conversion rate 1 Msps
1.45 V ≤ VeREF+≤ VAVCC, VeREF- = 0 V,
fADC14CLK = 5 MHz, ADC14SHTx = 1h,
ADC14DIF = 0, Conversion rate 200 ksps
PRODUCT PREVIEW
IVeREF+
Peak input current single ended
input mode
0 V ≤ VeREF+ ≤ VAVCC, ADC14DIF = 0
TBD
mA
IVeREF+
Peak input current differential input
mode
0 V ≤ VeREF+ ≤ VAVCC, ADC14DIF = 1
TBD
mA
CVeREF±
Capacitance at VeREF± terminal
PSRR_DC
Power supply rejection ratio (DC)
AVCC = AVCC (min) – AVCC(max)
TA = 25°C
PSRR_AC
Power supply rejection ratio (AC)
dAVCC = 0.1V at 1 kHz
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
48
(4)
5
µF
TBD
TBD
µV/V
mV/V
The accuracy limits the minimum positive external reference voltage. Lower reference voltage levels down to 1.2 V may be applied with
reduced accuracy requirements for DNL, INL and SNR at 1 Msps or for ≤500-ksps specified accuracy can still be achieved.
The accuracy limits the maximum negative external reference voltage. For 1-Msps, higher reference voltage levels up to AVCC – 1.2 V
may be applied with reduced speed and accuracy, or for ≤500 ksps, specified accuracy can still be achieved.
The accuracy limits minimum external differential reference voltage. Lower differential reference voltage levels may be applied with
reduced accuracy requirements.
Two decoupling capacitors, 5 µF and 50 nF, should be connected to VeREF to decouple the dynamic current required for an external
reference source if it is used for the ADC14. See also the MSP432P4xx Family Technical Reference Manual (SLAU356).
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
5.10.7 REF_A
Table 5-43. REF_A, Built-In Reference
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
Positive built-in reference
voltage output
VREF+
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX
REFVSEL = {0} for 1.2 V
REFON = 1
1.62 V
1.2
±1%
REFVSEL = {1} for 1.45 V
REFON = 1
1.75 V
1.45
±1%
REFVSEL = {2} for 2.0 V
REFON = 1
2.3 V
2.0
±1%
REFVSEL = {3} for 2.5 V
REFON = 1
2.8 V
2.5
±1%
V
REFVSEL = {0} for 1.2 V
1.62
REFVSEL = {1} for 1.45 V
1.75
REFVSEL = {2} for 2.0 V
2.3
REFVSEL = {3} for 2.5 V
2.8
AVCC(min)
AVCC minimum voltage,
Positive built-in reference
active
IREF+
Operating supply current into
AVCC terminal (1)
REFON = 1
IL(VREF+)
Load-current regulation,
VREF+ terminal
REFVSEL = {0, 1, 2, 3}, I(VREF+) = +10
µA/–1000 µA,
AVCC = AVCC(min) for each reference level,
REFON = REFOUT = 1
CVREF±
Capacitance at VREF+,
VREF- terminals
REFON = REFOUT = 1
UNIT
3V
V
12
0
20
µA
2500
µV/mA
100
pF
PSRR_DC Power supply rejection ratio
(DC) after ADC buffer
REFOUT0
AVCC = AVCC(min) for each reference level,
REFVSEL = {0,1,2, 3}, REFON = 1,
REFOUT = 0
120
300
µV/V
PSRR_DC Power supply rejection ratio
(DC) after ADC buffer
REFOUT1
AVCC = AVCC(min) for each reference level,
REFVSEL = {0,1,2, 3}, REFON = 1,
REFOUT = 1
50
100
µV/V
PSRR_AC Power supply rejection ratio
(AC) after ADC buffer
REFOUT0
AVCC = AVCC(min) for each reference level,
dAVCC = 0.1V at 1 kHz,
REFVSEL = {0,1,2, 3}, REFON = 1,
REFOUT = 0
6.4
10
mV/V
PSRR_AC Power supply rejection ratio
(AC) after ADC buffer
REFOUT1
AVCC = AVCC(min) for each reference level,
dAVCC = 0.1V at 1 kHz,
REFVSEL = {0,1,2, 3}, REFON = 1,
REFOUT = 1
2
5
mV/V
<10
20
ppm/°
C
TCREF+
(2)
Temperature coefficient of
built-in reference
REFVSEL = {0, 1, 2, 3}, REFON = 1, TA =
–40°C to 85°C
TCREF+
(2)
Temperature coefficient of
built-in reference
REFVSEL = {0, 1, 2, 3}, REFON = 1, TA = 0°C
to 50°C
<5
15
ppm/°
C
Settling time of reference
voltage (3)
AVCC = AVCC (min) - AVCC(max)
REFVSEL = {0, 1, 2, 3}, REFON = 0 → 1
75
90
µs
tSETTLE
(1)
(2)
(3)
The internal reference current is supplied from terminal AVCC.
Calculated using the box method: (MAX(–40°C to 85°C) – MIN(–40°C to 85°C)) / MIN(–40°C to 85°C)/(85°C – (–40°C)).
The condition is that the error in a ADC conversion started after tSETTLE is less than ±0.5 LSB.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
49
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
5.10.8 Comparator_E
Table 5-44. Comparator_E
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
VCC
TEST CONDITIONS
Supply voltage
IAVCC_COMP
IAVCC_REF
Comparator
operating supply
current into AVCC,
Excludes reference
resistor ladder
Quiescent current
of resistor ladder
into AVCC,
Includes REF_A
module current
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Reference voltage
level
VREF
1.62
50
3.7
15
CMPPWRMD = 01, CMPON = 1, CMPRSx = 00
(medium)
2.2 V,
3V
6.5
10
CMPPWRMD = 10, CMPON = 1, CMPRSx = 00
(slow), TA = 30°C
2.2 V,
3V
0.5
CMPPWRMD = 10, CMPON = 1, CMPRSx = 00
(slow), TA = 85°C
2.2 V,
3V
1.2
CMPREFACC = 0, CMPREFLx = 01, CMPRSx = 10,
REFON = 0, CMPON = 0
2.2 V,
3V
15
26
CMPREFACC = 1, CMPREFLx = 01, CMPRSx = 10,
REFON = 0, CMPON = 0
2.2 V,
3V
7
10
CMPRSx = 11, CMPREFLx = 01, CMPREFACC = 0
1.62 V
1.17
1.2
1.23
CMPRSx = 11, CMPREFLx = 10, CMPREFACC = 0
2.2 V
1.95
2.0
2.05
CMPRSx = 11, CMPREFLx = 11, CMPREFACC = 0
2.7 V
2.40
2.5
2.60
CMPRSx = 11, CMPREFLx = 01, CMPREFACC = 1
1.62 V
1.10
1.2
1.23
CMPRSx = 11, CMPREFLx = 10, CMPREFACC = 1
2.2 V
1.90
2.0
2.05
CMPRSx = 11, CMPREFLx = 11, CMPREFACC = 1
2.7 V
2.4
2.5
2.6
CMPPWRMD = 10
tPD,filter
MAX
11
VOFFSET
tPD
TYP
2.2 V,
3V
VIC
RSIN
MIN
CMPPWRMD = 00, CMPON = 1, CMPRSx = 00
(fast)
Common mode
input range
CIN
VCC
µA
VCC–1
CMPPWRMD = 00
–10
+10
Input offset voltage CMPPWRMD = 01
–20
+20
–20
+20
Series input
resistance
Propagation delay,
response time
Propagation delay
with filter active
Specifications
CMPPWRMD = 00 or CMPPWRMD = 01
5
CMPPWRMD = 10
5
ON (switch closed)
2
OFF (switch opened)
V
µA
0
Input capacitance
UNIT
V
V
mV
pF
pF
4
50
kΩ
MΩ
CMPPWRMD = 00, CMPF = 0,
Overdrive = 20 mV
150
300
CMPPWRMD = 01, CMPF = 0,
Overdrive = 20 mV
200
400
CMPPWRMD = 10, CMPF = 0,
Overdrive = 20 mV
5
10
CMPPWRMD = 00, CMPF = 0,
Overdrive = 100 mV
150
300
CMPPWRMD = 01, CMPF = 0,
Overdrive = 100 mV
200
400
CMPPWRMD = 10, CMPF = 0,
Overdrive = 100 mV
5
10
CMPPWRMD = 00 or 01, CMPF = 1,
Overdrive = 20 mV, CMPFDLY = 00
1.1
1.8
CMPPWRMD = 00 or 01, CMPF = 1,
Overdrive = 20 mV, CMPFDLY = 01
1.4
2.6
CMPPWRMD = 00 or 01, CMPF = 1,
Overdrive = 20 mV, CMPFDLY = 10
2
3.5
CMPPWRMD = 00 or 01, CMPF = 1,
Overdrive = 20 mV, CMPFDLY = 11
3
5
ns
µs
ns
µs
µs
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Comparator_E (continued)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
tEN_CMP
tEN_CMP_VREF
tEN_CMP_RL
VCMP_REF
TYP
MAX
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 00,
VIN+, VIN- from pins, Overdrive = 20 mV
0.6
1
Comparator enable CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 01,
time
VIN+, VIN- from pins, Overdrive = 20 mV
0.7
1
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 10,
VIN+, VIN- from pins, Overdrive = 20 mV
20
30
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 00,
CMPREFLx = 10, CMPRSx = 11, REFON = 0,
Overdrive = 20 mV
2
3
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 01,
CMPREFLx = 10, CMPRSx = 11, REFON = 0,
Overdrive = 20 mV
2
3
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 10,
CMPREFLx = 10, CMPRSx = 11, REFON = 0,
Overdrive = 20 mV
20
30
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 00,
CMPREFLx = 10, CMPRSx = 10, REFON = 0,
CMPREF0/1 = 0x0F, Overdrive = 20 mV
2.5
5
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 01,
CMPREFLx = 10, CMPRSx = 10, REFON = 0,
CMPREF0/1 = 0x0F, Overdrive = 20 mV
2.5
5
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 10,
CMPREFLx = 10, CMPRSx = 10, REFON = 0,
CMPREF0/1 = 0x0F, Overdrive = 20 mV
20
30
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 00,
CMPREFLx = 10, CMPRSx = 10, REFON = 1,
CMPREF0/1 = 0x0F
1
2
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 01,
CMPREFLx = 10, CMPRSx = 10, REFON = 1,
CMPREF0/1 = 0x0F
1
2
CMPON = 0 to CMPON = 1, CMPPWRMD = 10,
CMPREFLx = 10, CMPRSx = 10, REFON = 1,
CMPREF0/1 = 0x0F
20
30
VIN ×
(n+1) /
32
VIN ×
(n+1.1)
/ 32
Comparator and
reference ladder
and reference
voltage enable
time
Comparator and
reference ladder
enable time
Reference voltage
for a given tap
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
VIN = reference into resistor ladder,
n = 0 to 31
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MIN
UNIT
µs
µs
VIN ×
(n+0.9)
/ 32
Specifications
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PARAMETER
µs
V
51
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
5.10.9 eUSCI
Table 5-45. eUSCI (UART Mode), Recommended Operating Conditions
PARAMETER
feUSCI
eUSCI input clock frequency
fBITCLK
BITCLK clock frequency
(equals baud rate in MBaud)
TEST CONDITIONS
VCORE
Internal: SMCLK
External: UCLK
Duty cycle = 50% ± 10%
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX UNIT
1.2 V
12
1.4 V
24
1.2 V
1
1.4 V
3
MHz
MHz
Table 5-46. eUSCI (UART Mode)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
UART receive deglitch time (1)
tt
(1)
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX
UCGLITx = 0
10
UCGLITx = 1
25
90
UCGLITx = 2
45
140
UCGLITx = 3
60
190
UNIT
40
ns
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Pulses on the UART receive input (UCxRX) shorter than the UART receive deglitch time are suppressed. Thus the selected deglitch
time can limit the max. useable baud rate. To ensure that pulses are correctly recognized, their duration should exceed the maximum
specification of the deglitch time.
Table 5-47. eUSCI (SPI Master Mode), Recommended Operating Conditions
PARAMETER
feUSCI
CONDITIONS
SMCLK
Duty cycle = 50% ± 10%
eUSCI input clock frequency
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX UNIT
VCORE = 1.2 V
12
VCORE = 1.4 V
24
MHz
Table 5-48. eUSCI (SPI Master Mode)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (1)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
VCORE
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX
tSTE,LEAD
STE lead time, STE active to clock
UCSTEM = 1,
UCMODEx = 01 or 10
tSTE,LAG
STE lag time, Last clock to STE
inactive
UCSTEM = 1,
UCMODEx = 01 or 10
tSTE,ACC
STE access time, STE active to
SIMO data out
UCSTEM = 0,
UCMODEx = 01 or 10
1.2 V
1.62 V
90
1.4 V
3.7 V
50
tSTE,DIS
STE disable time, STE inactive to
SIMO high impedance
UCSTEM = 0,
UCMODEx = 01 or 10
1.2 V
1.62 V
35
1.4 V
3.7 V
10
tSU,MI
SOMI input data setup time
1.2 V
1.62 V
50
1.4 V
3.7 V
25
tHD,MI
SOMI input data hold time
1.2 V
1.62 V
0
1.4 V
3.7 V
0
tVALID,MO
SIMO output data valid time (2)
UCLK edge to SIMO valid,
CL = 20 pF
1.2 V
1.62 V
5
1.4 V
3.7 V
1
tHD,MO
SIMO output data hold time (3)
CL = 20 pF
1.2 V
1.62 V
0
1.4 V
3.7 V
0
(1)
(2)
(3)
52
1
1
UNIT
UCxCLK
cycles
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
fUCxCLK = 1/2tLO/HI with tLO/HI = max(tVALID,MO(eUSCI) + tSU,SI(Slave), tSU,MI(eUSCI) + tVALID,SO(Slave)).
For the slave parameters tSU,SI(Slave) and tVALID,SO(Slave) refer to the SPI parameters of the attached slave.
Specifies the time to drive the next valid data to the SIMO output after the output changing UCLK clock edge. Refer to the timing
diagrams in Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4.
Specifies how long data on the SIMO output is valid after the output changing UCLK clock edge. Negative values indicate that the data
on the SIMO output can become invalid before the output changing clock edge observed on UCLK. Refer to the timing diagrams in
Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4.
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
UCMODEx = 01
tSTE,LEAD
STE
tSTE,LAG
UCMODEx = 10
1/fUCxCLK
CKPL = 0
UCLK
CKPL = 1
tLOW/HIGH
tLOW/HIGH
tSU,MI
tHD,MI
SOMI
tHD,MO
tSTE,ACC
tSTE,DIS
tVALID,MO
PRODUCT PREVIEW
SIMO
Figure 5-3. SPI Master Mode, CKPH = 0
UCMODEx = 01
tSTE,LEAD
STE
tSTE,LAG
UCMODEx = 10
1/fUCxCLK
CKPL = 0
UCLK
CKPL = 1
tLOW/HIGH
tLOW/HIGH
tSU,MI
tHD,MI
SOMI
tHD,MO
tSTE,ACC
tVALID,MO
tSTE,DIS
SIMO
Figure 5-4. SPI Master Mode, CKPH = 1
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
53
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-49. eUSCI (SPI Slave Mode)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
(see Note (1))
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
VCORE
VCC
1.2 V
1.62 V
MIN
65
1.4 V
3.7 V
45
1.2 V
1.62 V
5
1.4 V
3.7 V
5
TYP MAX UNIT
PRODUCT PREVIEW
tSTE,LEAD
STE lead time, STE active to clock
tSTE,LAG
STE lag time, Last clock to STE inactive
tSTE,ACC
STE access time, STE active to SOMI data
out
1.2 V
1.62 V
90
1.4 V
3.7 V
50
tSTE,DIS
STE disable time, STE inactive to SOMI
high impedance
1.2 V
1.62 V
30
1.4 V
3.7 V
10
tSU,SI
SIMO input data setup time
1.2 V
1.62 V
8
1.4 V
3.7 V
4
tHD,SI
SIMO input data hold time
1.2 V
1.62 V
7
1.4 V
3.7 V
6
tVALID,SO
SOMI output data valid time (2)
UCLK edge to SOMI valid,
CL = 20 pF
1.2 V
1.62 V
50
1.4 V
3.7 V
10
tHD,SO
SOMI output data hold time (3)
CL = 20 pF
1.2 V
1.62 V
0
1.4 V
3.7 V
0
(1)
(2)
(3)
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
fUCxCLK = 1/2tLO/HI with tLO/HI ≥ max(tVALID,MO(Master) + tSU,SI(eUSCI), tSU,MI(Master) + tVALID,SO(eUSCI)).
For the master parameters tSU,MI(Master) and tVALID,MO(Master) refer to the SPI parameters of the attached slave.
Specifies the time to drive the next valid data to the SOMI output after the output changing UCLK clock edge. Refer to the timing
diagrams in Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6.
Specifies how long data on the SOMI output is valid after the output changing UCLK clock edge. Refer to the timing diagrams in
Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6.
UCMODEx = 01
tSTE,LEAD
STE
tSTE,LAG
UCMODEx = 10
1/fUCxCLK
CKPL = 0
UCLK
CKPL = 1
tLOW/HIGH
tSU,SI
tLOW/HIGH
tHD,SI
SIMO
tHD,SO
tSTE,ACC
tSTE,DIS
tVALID,SO
SOMI
Figure 5-5. SPI Slave Mode, CKPH = 0
54
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
UCMODEx = 01
tSTE,LEAD
STE
tSTE,LAG
UCMODEx = 10
1/fUCxCLK
CKPL = 0
UCLK
CKPL = 1
tLOW/HIGH
tLOW/HIGH
tHD,SI
tSU,SI
SIMO
tHD,SO
tSTE,DIS
tVALID,SO
SOMI
Figure 5-6. SPI Slave Mode, CKPH = 1
Table 5-50. eUSCI (I2C Mode), Recommended Operating Conditions
PARAMETER
feUSCI
eUSCI input clock
frequency
fSCL
SCL clock frequency
TEST CONDITIONS
Internal: SMCLK
External: UCLK
Duty cycle = 50% ± 10%
VCORE
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX UNIT
1.2 V
12
1.4 V
24
MHz
1 MHz
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
55
PRODUCT PREVIEW
tSTE,ACC
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 5-51. eUSCI (I2C Mode)
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted) (see Figure 5-7)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
VCC
MIN
fSCL = 100 kHz
tHD,STA
Hold time (repeated) START
tSU,STA
fSCL = 400 kHz
Setup time for a repeated START
2.2 V, 3.0 V
500
fSCL = 100 kHz
5.0
2.2 V, 3.0 V
fSCL = 1 MHz
Data hold time
fSCL = 400 kHz
2.2 V, 3.0 V
tSU,STO
fSCL = 400 kHz
Setup time for STOP
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Pulse duration of spikes suppressed by
input filter
tSP
ns
0
ns
250
2.2 V, 3.0 V
100
fSCL = 1 MHz
50
fSCL = 100 kHz
5.0
fSCL = 400 kHz
µs
1.25
0
fSCL = 100 kHz
Data setup time
ns
0
fSCL = 1 MHz
tSU,DAT
2.2 V, 3.0 V
ns
µs
1.25
fSCL = 1 MHz
500
UCGLITx = 0
60
200
UCGLITx = 1
35
110
20
65
UCGLITx = 2
2.2 V, 3.0 V
UCGLITx = 3
ns
10
Clock low time-out
UCCLTOx = 2
27
2.2 V, 3.0 V
30
UCCLTOx = 3
tSU,STA
tHD,STA
ns
45
UCCLTOx = 1
tTIMEOUT
UNIT
µs
500
fSCL = 100 kHz
tHD,DAT
MAX
1.25
fSCL = 1 MHz
fSCL = 400 kHz
TYP
5.0
ms
33
tHD,STA
tBUF
SDA
tLOW
tHIGH
tSP
SCL
tSU,DAT
tSU,STO
tHD,DAT
Figure 5-7. I2C Mode Timing
56
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
5.10.10 Timer_A
Table 5-52. Timer_A
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
TEST CONDITIONS
Timer_A input clock
frequency
Internal: SMCLK
External: TACLK
Duty cycle = 50% ± 10%
tTA,cap
Timer_A capture timing
All capture inputs,
Minimum pulse duration required for
capture
VCC
MIN
TYP
MAX UNIT
1.2V
12
1.4V
24
20
MHz
ns
PRODUCT PREVIEW
fTA
VCORE
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
57
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
5.10.11 Memories
Table 5-53. Flash Memory
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
TEST
CONDITIONS
PARAMETER
DVCCPGM/ERS
Supply voltage for program or erase
IPGM/ERS, AVG
Average supply current from DVCC during program or erase
IPGM/ERS, PEAK
Peak supply current from DVCC during program or erase
NEndurance
Program or erase endurance
tRetention
Data retention duration
tword
Word program time without preverify (VER_PRE = 0) (1)
TYP
1.62
TBD
MAX
Word program time with preverify (VER_PRE = 1)
tblock,
Block program time for the first data
UNIT
3.7
V
35
mA
50
mA
20000
TJ = TBD
tword, ver
0
MIN
cycles
20
years
(1)
37
39
µs
62
63
µs
11
12
µs
8
9
µs
PRODUCT PREVIEW
tblock, 1-(N-1)
Block program time for each additional data, except for last data
tblock,
Block program time for the last data
13
14
µs
tERS
Segment or mass erase time
2.5
3
ms
ters2ersver
Erase to erase verify mode transition time
2
3
µs
tnrd2ersver
Normal read to erase verify mode transition time
11
12
µs
tpgm2pgmver
Program to program verify mode transition time
13.5
15
µs
tnrd2pgmver
Normal read to program verify mode transition time
13.5
15
µs
(1)
N
After verify enabled (VER_PST = 1).
Table 5-54. SRAM
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
ISRAM_EN
Current consumption of one SRAM bank when enabled
ISRAM_RET
Current consumption of one SRAM bank under retention
tSRAM_EN,
TEST CONDITIONS
MIN
TYP
VCORE = 1.2 V
80
VCORE = 1.4 V
290
VCORE = 1.2 V
27
VCORE = 1.4 V
31
MAX
UNIT
nA
nA
one
Time taken to enable one SRAM bank
4
5
µs
tSRAM_DIS, one
Time taken to disable one SRAM bank
4
5
µs
tSRAM_EN,
all
Time taken to enable all SRAM banks except Bank-0
7
8
µs
tSRAM_DIS, all
Time taken to disable all SRAM banks except Bank-0
4
5
µs
58
Specifications
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
5.10.12 Emulation and Debug
Table 5-55. JTAG
over recommended ranges of supply voltage and operating free-air temperature (unless otherwise noted)
PARAMETER
MIN
TYP
0
MAX
UNIT
10
MHz
fTCK
TCK clock frequency
tTCK
TCK clock period
tTCK_LOW
TCK clock low time
tTCK/2
ns
tTCK_HIGH
TCK clock high time
tTCK/2
ns
tTCK_RISE
TCK rise time
0
10
ns
tTCK_FALL
TCK fall time
0
10
ns
tTMS_SU
TMS setup time to TCK rise
tTMS_HLD
TMS hold time from TCK rise
tTDI_SU
TDI setup time to TCK rise
tTDI_HLD
TDI hold time from TCK rise
tTDO_ZDV
TCK fall to data valid from high impedance
TBD
42
ns
tTDO_DV
TCK fall to data valid from data valid
TBD
40
ns
tTDO_DVZ
TCK fall to high impedance from data valid
TBD
33
ns
100
ns
28
ns
ns
ns
4
ns
PRODUCT PREVIEW
4
18
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Specifications
59
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6 Detailed Description
6.1
Processor and Execution Features
The ARM Cortex-M4 processor provides a high-performance low-cost platform that meets system
requirements of minimal memory implementation, reduced pin count, and low power consumption, while
delivering outstanding computational performance and exceptional system response to interrupts. The
Thumb-2 mixed 16- and 32-bit instruction set of the processor delivers the high performance that is
expected of a 32-bit ARM core in a compact memory size usually associated with 8- and 16-bit devices
(typically in the range of a few kilobytes of memory needed for microcontroller-class applications).
In the MSP432P401x devices, the Cortex-M4 processor can run up to 48 MHz, delivering high
performance for the targeted class of applications, while at the same time maintaining ultra-low active
power consumption.
6.1.1
Floating Point Unit
The Cortex-M4 processor on the MSP432P401x devices includes a tightly coupled Floating Point Unit
(FPU). The FPU is an IEEE754 compliant single precision floating point module supporting add, subtract,
multiply, divide, accumulate, and square-root operations. It also provides conversion between fixed-point
and floating-point data formats and floating point constant instructions.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
6.1.2
Memory Protection Unit
The Cortex-M4 processor on the MSP432P401x devices includes a tightly coupled Memory Protection
Unit (MPU) that supports up to eight protection regions. Applications can use this to enforce memory
privilege rules, thus allowing isolation of processes from each other, or enforce memory access rules.
These features are typically required for operating system handling purposes.
6.1.3
Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller
The MSP432P401x devices include a Nested Vectored Interrupt Controller (NVIC) that supports up to 64
interrupts with eight levels of interrupt priority. The Cortex-M4 NVIC architecture allows for low latency,
efficient interrupt/event handling, and seamless integration to device-level power-control strategies.
6.1.4
SYSTICK
The Cortex-M4 includes an integrated system timer, SysTick, which provides a simple, 24-bit clear-onwrite, decrementing, wrap-on-zero counter with a flexible control mechanism. The counter can be used in
several different ways, and is typically deployed either for Operating System related purposes or as a
general purpose alarm mechanism.
6.1.5
Debug and Trace Features
The Cortex-M4 processor implements a complete hardware debug solution, providing high system visibility
of the processor and memory through either a traditional 4-pin JTAG port or a 2-pin Serial Wire Debug
(SWD) port, typically ideal for microcontrollers and other small package devices. The SWJ-DP interface
combines the SWD and JTAG debug ports into one module, allowing a seamless switch between the 2pin and 4-pin modes of operation, depending on application needs.
For system trace, the processor integrates an Instrumentation Trace Macrocell (ITM) alongside data
watchpoints and a profiling unit. To enable simple and cost-effective profiling of the system trace events, a
Serial Wire Viewer (SWV) can export a stream of software-generated messages, data trace, and profiling
information through a single pin.
60
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
NOTE
For detailed specifications and information on the programmers model for the Cortex-M4
CPU as well as the associated peripherals mentioned throughout Section 6.1, see the
appropriate reference manual at www.arm.com.
6.2
Memory Map
The device supports a 4-GB address space that is divided into eight 512-MB zones (see Figure 6-1).
0xFFFF_FFFF
Debug/Trace
Peripherals
0xE000_0000
0xDFFF_FFFF
Unused
0xC000_0000
0xBFFF_FFFF
Unused
PRODUCT PREVIEW
0xA000_0000
0x9FFF_FFFF
Unused
0x8000_0000
0x7FFF_FFFF
Unused
0x6000_0000
0x5FFF_FFFF
Peripherals
0x4000_0000
0x3FFF_FFFF
SRAM
0x2000_0000
0x1FFF_FFFF
Code
0x0000_0000
Figure 6-1. Device Memory Zones
6.2.1
CODE Zone Memory Map
The region from 0x0000_0000 to 0x1FFF_FFFF is defined as the Code zone, and is accessible through
the ICODE and DCODE buses of the Cortex-M4 processor as well as through the system DMA. This
region maps the flash, the ROM as well as the internal SRAM (permitting optimal single cycle execution
from the SRAM).
The MSP432P401x specific memory map of the Code Zone, as visible to the user code (see Figure 6-2).
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
61
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Figure 6-2. CODE Zone Memory Map
6.2.1.1
Flash Memory Region
The 4-MB region from 0x0000_0000 to 0x003F_FFFF is defined as the flash memory region. This region
is further divided into different types of flash memory regions which are explained in Section 6.3.1.
6.2.1.2
SRAM Memory Region
The 1-MB region from 0x0100_0000 to 0x010F_FFFF is defined as the SRAM region. This region is also
aliased in the SRAM zone of the device, thereby allowing efficient access to the SRAM, both for
instruction fetches as well as data reads. Refer to Section 6.3.2 for more details.
6.2.1.3
ROM Memory Region
The 1-MB region from 0x0200_0000 to 0x020F_FFFF is defined as the ROM memory region. Details
about the ROM memory can be found in Section 6.3.3.
62
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
6.2.2
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
SRAM Zone Memory Map
The SRAM Zone of the device lies in the address range of 0x2000_0000 to 0x3FFF_FFFF. This is further
divided as shown in Figure 6-3.
0x3FFF_FFFF
Reserved
0x2400_0000
PRODUCT PREVIEW
SRAM
Bit-Band Alias
Region
0x2200_0000
Reserved
0x2010_0000
SRAM Memory
Region
0x2000_0000
Figure 6-3. SRAM Zone Memory Map
6.2.2.1
SRAM Memory Region
The 1-MB region from 0x2000_0000 to 0x200F_FFFF is defined as the SRAM region. The SRAM memory
accessible in this region is also aliased in the Code zone of the device, thereby allowing efficient access to
the SRAM, both for instruction fetches as well as data reads. Refer to Section 6.3.2 for details about the
SRAM memory.
6.2.2.2
SRAM Bit Band Alias Region
The 32-MB region from 0x2200_0000 through 0x23FF_FFFF forms the bit-band alias region for the 1-MB
SRAM region. Bit-banding is a feature of the Cortex-M4 processor and allows the application to set or
clear individual bits throughout the SRAM memory space without using the pipeline bandwidth of the
processor to carry out an exclusive read-modify-write sequence.
6.2.3
Peripheral Zone Memory Map
The Peripheral Zone of the device lies in the address range of 0x4000_0000 to 0x5FFF_FFFF. This is
further divided as shown in Figure 6-4.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
63
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
0x5FFF_FFFF
Reserved
0x4400_0000
Peripheral
Bit-Band Alias
Region
0x4200_0000
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Reserved
0x4010_0000
Peripheral
Region
0x4000_0000
Figure 6-4. Peripheral Zone Memory Map
6.2.3.1
Peripheral Region
The 1-MB region from 0x4000_0000 to 0x400F_FFFF is dedicated to the system and application control
peripherals of the device. On the MSP432P401x devices, a total of 128KB of this region is dedicated for
peripherals, while the rest is marked as reserved. The peripheral allocation within this 128-KB space is
listed in Table 6-1. Note that all peripherals may not be available in all devices of the family (details in the
Remarks column). If a peripheral is listed as NA for a particular device, the corresponding address space
must be treated as reserved.
NOTE
Peripherals that are marked as 16-bit should be accessed through byte or half-word size
read/write only. Any 32-bit access to these peripherals results in a bus error response.
Table 6-1. Peripheral Address Offsets
64
ADDRESS RANGE
PERIPHERAL
REMARKS
0x4000_0000–0x4000_03FF
Timer_A0
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_0400–0x4000_07FF
Timer_A1
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_0800–0x4000_0BFF
Timer_A2
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_0C00–0x4000_0FFF
Timer_A3
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_1000–0x4000_13FF
eUSCI_A0
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_1400–0x4000_17FF
eUSCI_A1
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_1800–0x4000_1BFF
eUSCI_A2
16-bit peripheral
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
ADDRESS RANGE
PERIPHERAL
REMARKS
0x4000_1C00–0x4000_1FFF
eUSCI_A3
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_2000–0x4000_23FF
eUSCI_B0
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_2400–0x4000_27FF
eUSCI_B1
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_2800–0x4000_2BFF
eUSCI_B2
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_2C00–0x4000_2FFF
eUSCI_B3
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_3000–0x4000_33FF
REF_A
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_3400–0x4000_37FF
COMP_E0
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_3800–0x4000_3BFF
COMP_E1
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_3C00–0x4000_3FFF
AES256
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_4000–0x4000_43FF
CRC32
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_4400–0x4000_47FF
RTC_C
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_4800–0x4000_4BFF
WDT_A
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_4C00–0x4000_4FFF
Port Module
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_5000–0x4000_53FF
Port Mapping Controller
16-bit peripheral
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_5400–0x4000_57FF
Capacitive Touch I/O 0
0x4000_5800–0x4000_5BFF
Capacitive Touch I/O 1
16-bit peripheral
0x4000_5C00–0x4000_8FFF
Reserved
Read only, always reads 0h
Read only, always reads 0h
0x4000_9000–0x4000_BFFF
Reserved
0x4000_C000–0x4000_CFFF
Timer32
0x4000_D000–0x4000_DFFF
Reserved
0x4000_E000–0x4000_FFFF
DMA
0x4001_0000–0x4001_03FF
PCM
0x4001_0400–0x4001_07FF
CS
0x4001_0800–0x4001_0FFF
PSS
Read only, always reads 0h
0x4001_1000–0x4001_17FF
Flash Controller
0x4001_1800–0x4001_1BFF
Reserved
Read only, always reads 0h
0x4001_1C00–0x4001_1FFF
Reserved
Read only, always reads 0h
6.2.3.2
0x4001_2000–0x4001_23FF
ADC14
0x4001_2400–0x4001_FFFF
Reserved
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 6-1. Peripheral Address Offsets (continued)
Read only, always reads 0h
Peripheral Bit Band Alias Region
The 32-MB region from 0x4200_0000 through 0x43FF_FFFF forms the bit-band alias region for the 1MB
Peripheral region. Bit-banding is a feature of the Cortex-M4 processor and allows the application to
set/clear individual bits throughout the peripheral memory space without using the pipeline bandwidth of
the processor to carry out an exclusive read-modify-write sequence.
NOTE
The restriction of accessing 16-bit peripherals only through byte or half-word accesses also
applies to the corresponding bit-band region of these peripherals. In other words, writes to
the bit-band alias region for these peripherals must be in the form of byte or half-word
accesses only.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
65
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.2.4
www.ti.com
Debug and Trace Peripheral Zone
This zone maps the internal as well as external PPB regions of the Cortex-M4. The following peripherals
are mapped to this zone
• Core and System debug control registers (internal PPB)
• NVIC and other registers in the System Control space of the Cortex-M4 (internal PPB)
• FPB, DWT, ITM (internal PPB)
• TPIU, Debug ROM table (external PPB)
• Reset Controller (external PPB)
• System Controller (external PPB)
Table 6-2. Debug Zone Memory Map
ADDRESS RANGE
MODULE OR PERIPHERAL
REMARKS
0xE000_0000–0xE000_0FFF
ITM
Internal PPB
0xE000_1000–0xE000_1FFF
DWT
Internal PPB
0xE0000_2000–0xE000_2FFF
FPB
Internal PPB
PRODUCT PREVIEW
0xE000_3000–0xE000_DFFF
Reserved
Internal PPB
0xE000_E000–0xE000_EFFF
Cortex-M4 System Control Space
Internal PPB
0xE000_F000–0xE003_FFFF
Reserved
Internal PPB
0xE004_0000–0xE004_0FFF
TPIU
External PPB
0xE004_1000–0xE004_1FFF
Reserved
External PPB
0xE004_2000–0xE004_23FF
Reset Controller
External PPB
0xE004_2400–0xE004_2FFF
Reserved
External PPB
0xE004_3000–0xE004_33FF
System Controller
External PPB
0xE004_3400–0xE004_3FFF
Reserved
External PPB
0xE004_4000–0xE004_43FF
System Controller
External PPB
External PPB
0xE004_4400–0xE00F_EFFF
Reserved
0xE00F_F000–0xE00F_FFFF
ROM Table (External PPB)
External PPB
0xE010_0000–0xFFFF_FFFF
Reserved
Vendor Space
NOTE
Refer to the Cortex-M4 TRM for the address maps of the ARM modules listed above
NOTE
The region from 0xE004_4000–0xE004_43FF is reserved for System Controller registers.
These registers are detailed in various sections of this data sheet
6.3
Memories on the MSP432P401x
The MSP432P401x devices include flash and SRAM memories for general application purposes. In
addition, the devices include a backup memory (a portion of total available SRAM) that is retained in lowpower modes.
6.3.1
Flash Memory
The MSP432P401x devices include a high-endurance low-power flash memory that supports up to 20000
write and erase cycles. The flash memory is 128 bits wide thereby enabling high code execution
performance by virtue of each fetch returning up to four 32-bit instructions (or up to eight 16-bit
instructions). The flash is further divided into two types of subregions: Main Memory and Information
Memory.
66
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
From a physical perspective the flash memory comprises of two banks, with the main and information
memory regions divided equally between the two banks. This permits application to carry out a
simultaneous read or execute operation from one bank while the other bank may be undergoing a
program or erase operation.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The memory map of flash on MSP432P401x devices is shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5. Flash Memory Map
6.3.1.1
Flash Main Memory (0x0000_0000 to 0x0003_FFFF)
The flash main memory on MSP432P401x devices can be up to 256KB. Flash main memory consists of
up to 64 sectors of 4KB each, with a minimum erase granularity of 4KB (1 sector). The main memory can
be viewed as two independent, identical banks of up to 128KB each, allowing simultaneous read/execute
from one bank while the other bank is undergoing program/erase operation.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
67
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.3.1.1.1 Flash Size Register (Address = 0xE004_3020h)
This register reflects the size of flash main memory available on the device.
Figure 6-6. SYS_FLASH_SIZE Register
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
r
r
r
r
r
r-1
r
r
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
SIZE
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
SIZE
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
Table 6-3. SYS_FLASH_SIZE Register Description
BIT
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
DESCRIPTION
31-0
SIZE
R
Variable
Indicates the size (in bytes) of the flash main memory on the device. This is
divided equally between the two banks.
6.3.1.2
Flash Information Memory (0x0020_0000 to 0x0020_3FFF)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The flash information memory region is 16KB. Flash information memory consists of four sectors of 4KB
each, with a minimum erase granularity of 4KB (1 sector). The information memory can be viewed as two
independent blocks of 8KB each, which allows read or execute from one block while the other block is
undergoing a program or erase operation. Table 6-4 describes different regions of flash information
memory and the contents of each of the regions. The flash information memory region that contains the
device descriptor (TLV) is factory configured for protection again write or erase operations.
Table 6-4. Flash Information Memory Regions
6.3.1.3
WRITE AND ERASE
PROTECTED?
REGION
ADDRESS RANGE
CONTENTS
Bank 0, Sector 0
0x0020_0000–0x0020_0FFF
Flash Boot-override Mailbox
No
Bank 0, Sector 1
0x0020_1000–0x0020_1FFF
Device Descriptor (TLV)
Yes
Bank 1, Sector 0
0x0020_2000–0x0020_2FFF
TI BSL
No
Bank 1, Sector 1
0x0020_3000–0x0020_3FFF
TI BSL
No
Flash Operation
The flash memory provides multiple read and program modes of operation that the application can deploy.
Up to 128 bits (memory word width) can be programmed (set from 1 to 0) in a single program operation.
Although the CPU data buses are 32 bits wide, the flash can buffer 128-bit write data before initiating flash
programming, thereby making it more seamless and power efficient for software to program large blocks
of data at a time. In addition, the flash memory also supports a burst write mode that takes less time when
compared to programming words individually. Refer to Flash Memory for information on timing
parameters.
The flash main and information memory regions offer write/erase protection control at a sector granularity
to enable software to optimize operations like mass erase while protecting certain regions of the flash. In
low-power modes of operation, the flash memory is disabled and put in a power-down state to minimize
leakage.
For details on the flash memory and its various modes of operation and configuration, refer to the Flash
Controller chapter in the MSP432P4xx Family Technical Reference Manual (SLAU356).
68
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
NOTE
Depending on the CPU (MCLK) frequency and the active mode in use, the flash may need to
be accessed with single/multiple wait states. Whenever there is a change required in the
operating frequency, it is the responsibility of the application to ensure that the flash access
wait states are configured correctly before the frequency change is effected. Refer to
electrical specification for details on flash wait state requirements.
6.3.2
SRAM
The MSP432P401x devices support up to 64KB of SRAM memory, with the rest of the 1MB SRAM
memory region treated as reserved. The SRAM memory is aliased in both Code as well as SRAM memory
zones. This enables fast, single cycle execution of code from the SRAM, as the Cortex-M4 processor
pipelines instruction fetches to memory zones other than the Code space. As with the flash memory, the
SRAM can be powered down or placed in a low leakage retention state in low-power modes of operation.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The memory map of SRAM on MSP432P401x devices is shown in Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7. SRAM Memory Map
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
69
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.3.2.1
www.ti.com
SRAM Bank Enable Configuration
The application can choose to optimize the power consumption of the SRAM. In order to enable this, the
SRAM memory is divided into 8KB banks that can individually be powered down. Banks that are powered
down remain powered down in both active as well as low-power modes of operation, thereby limiting any
unnecessary inrush current when the device transitions between active and retention based low-power
modes. The application can also choose to disable one (or more) banks for a certain stage in the
processing and re-enable it for another stage. Refer to Section 6.3.2.3 for details on how individual banks
can be controlled by the application.
Whenever a particular bank is disabled, reads to its address space return 0h, and writes are discarded. To
prevent 'holes' in the memory map, if a particular bank is enabled, all the lower banks are forced to
enabled state as well. This ensures a contiguous memory map through the set of enabled banks instead
of a possible disabled bank appearing between enabled banks.
NOTE
Bank0 is always enabled and cannot be powered down.
NOTE
PRODUCT PREVIEW
When any SRAM bank is enabled or disabled, accesses to the SRAM are temporarily stalled
to prevent spurious reads. This is handled transparently and does not require any code
intervention. Refer to SRAM characteristics in the electrical specification for the SRAM bank
enable or disable latency.
6.3.2.2
SRAM Bank Retention Configuration and Backup Memory
The application can choose to optimize the leakage power consumption of the SRAM in LPM3 and LPM4
modes of operation as well. In order to enable this, each SRAM bank can be individually configured for
retention. Banks that are enabled for retention retain their data through the LPM3 and LPM4 modes. The
application can also choose to retain a subset of the enabled banks.
For example, the application may need 32KB of SRAM for its processing needs (4 banks are kept
enabled). However, of these four banks, only one bank may contain critical data that must be retained in
LPM3 or LPM4 modes while the rest are powered off completely to minimize power consumption. Refer to
Section 6.3.2.3 for details on how individual banks can be controlled by the application.
Bank0 of SRAM is always retained and cannot be powered down. Therefore, it also operates up as a
possible backup memory in the LPM3, LPM4, and LPM3.5 modes of operation.
6.3.2.3
SRAM Status and Configuration Registers
This section lists the registers that can be used to configure and/or monitor status regarding the SRAM.
70
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.3.2.3.1 SRAM Size Register (Address = 0xE004_3010h)
This register reflects the size of the SRAM available on the device.
Figure 6-8. SYS_SRAM_SIZE Register
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
SIZE
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
SIZE
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
Table 6-5. SYS_SRAM_SIZE Register Description
BIT
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
DESCRIPTION
31-0
SIZE
R
Variable
Indicates the size (in bytes) of SRAM present on the device.
NOTE
6.3.2.3.2 SRAM Bank Enable Register (Address = E004_3014h)
This register configures which bank of the SRAM is powered up and available for the application. The
application can choose to enable or disable SRAM banks on the fly. While the SRAM banks are being
powered up or down, accesses to the SRAM space is temporarily stalled and is completed when the
SRAM banks are ready. Accesses to the rest of the memory map remain unaffected.
Figure 6-9. SYS_SRAM_BANKEN Register
31
30
29
r
r
r
15
14
13
r
r
r
28
27
r
r
12
11
Reserved
r
r
26
25
24
Reserved
r
r
r
10
9
8
r
r
r
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
16
SRAM
_RDY
r-0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BNK7_ BNK6_ BNK5_ BNK4_ BNK3_ BNK2_ BNK1_ BNK0_
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
EN
rw-<1> rw-<1> rw-<1> rw-<1> rw-<1> rw-<1> rw-<1>
r-1
Table 6-6. SYS_SRAM_BANKEN Register Description
BIT
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
DESCRIPTION
31-17
Reserved
R
0h
Reserved. Reads return 0h
16
SRAM_RDY (1)
R
0h
1b = SRAM is ready for accesses. All SRAM banks are enabled or disabled
according to values of bits 7:0 of this register
0b = SRAM is not ready for accesses. Banks are undergoing the enable/disable
sequence, and reads/Writes to SRAM will be stalled until the banks are ready
15-8
(1)
Reserved
R
0h
Reserved. Reads return 0h
This bit will automatically be set to 0 whenever any of the Bank Enable bits in this register are changed, which will in turn trigger off a
power up/down of the impacted SRAM blocks. It will set back to 1 after the power sequence is complete and the SRAM blocks are ready
for subsequent read/write accesses
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
71
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The SRAM on the MSP432P401x devices is divided into equal size banks of 8KB each. For
example, if the total SRAM available is 32KB, the device contains 4 SRAM banks.
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-6. SYS_SRAM_BANKEN Register Description (continued)
BIT
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
7
BNK7_EN (2)
RW
1h
DESCRIPTION
0b = Disables Bank7 of the SRAM
1b = enables Bank7 of the SRAM
When set to 1, bank enable bits for all banks below this bank are set to 1 as
well.
6
BNK6_EN
(2)
RW
1h
0b = Disables Bank6 of the SRAM
1b = enables Bank6 of the SRAM
When set to 1, bank enable bits for all banks below this bank are set to 1 as
well.
5
BNK5_EN
(2)
RW
1h
0b = Disables Bank5 of the SRAM
1b = enables Bank5 of the SRAM
When set to 1, bank enable bits for all banks below this bank are set to 1 as
well.
4
BNK4_EN
(2)
RW
1h
0b = Disables Bank4 of the SRAM
1b = enables Bank4 of the SRAM
PRODUCT PREVIEW
When set to 1, bank enable bits for all banks below this bank are set to 1 as
well.
3
BNK3_EN
(2)
RW
1h
0b = Disables Bank3 of the SRAM
1b = enables Bank3 of the SRAM
When set to 1, bank enable bits for all banks below this bank are set to 1 as
well.
2
BNK2_EN
(2)
RW
1h
0b = Disables Bank2 of the SRAM
1b = enables Bank2 of the SRAM
When set to 1, bank enable bits for all banks below this bank are set to 1 as
well.
1
BNK1_EN
(2)
RW
1h
0b = Disables Bank1 of the SRAM
1b = enables Bank1 of the SRAM
When set to 1, bank enable bits for all banks below this bank are set to 1 as
well.
0
(2)
BNK0_EN
R
1h
When 1, enables Bank0 of the SRAM
Writes to this bit are allowed ONLY when the SRAM_RDY bit is set to 1. If the bit is 0, it indicates that the SRAM banks are not ready,
and writes to this bit will be ignored
The SRAM Bank Enable Register controls which banks of the SRAM are enabled for read/write accesses.
There is one bit for each available bank (unused bits are reserved). Banks that are not enabled are
powered down to minimize power consumption. Each bit in this register corresponds to one bank of the
SRAM. Banks may only be enabled in a contiguous form. For example:
• If there are eight banks in the device, values of 00111111 and 00000111 are acceptable.
• Values like 00010111 are not valid, and the resultant bank configuration will be set to 00011111.
• For exmaple, for a 4-bank SRAM, the only allowed values are 0001, 0011, 0111, and 1111
72
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
NOTE
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Bank0 is always enabled and cannot be disabled. In the case of all other banks, any
enable/disable change will result in the SRAM_RDY bit of the SYS_SRAM_BANKEN register
being set to 0 until the configuration change is effective. Any accesses to the SRAM will be
stalled during this time frame, and resumed only after the SRAM banks are ready for read or
write operations.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
73
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.3.2.3.3 SRAM Bank Retention Control Register (Address = E004_3018h)
This register controls which bank of the SRAM is retained when the device enters LPM3 or LPM4 modes.
Any bank that is not enabled for retention will be completely powered down in these modes and will lose
its data
Figure 6-10. SYS_SRAM_BANKRET Register
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Reserved
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
15
14
13
10
9
8
r
r
r
r
r
r
12
11
Reserved
r
r
16
SRAM
_RDY
r
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BNK7_ BNK6_ BNK5_ BNK4_ BNK3_ BNK2_ BNK1_ BNK0_
RET
RET
RET
RET
RET
RET
RET
RET
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
r-1
Table 6-7. SYS_SRAM_BANKRET Register Description
BIT
FIELD
31-17
Reserved
16
SRAM_RDY
(1)
TYPE
RESET
DESCRIPTION
R
0h
Reserved. Reads return 0h
R
0h
PRODUCT PREVIEW
1b = SRAM is ready for accesses. All SRAM banks are enabled or disabled for
retention according to values of bits 7:0 of this register
0b = SRAM banks are being set up for retention. Entry into LPM3, LPM4 should
not be attempted until this bit is set to 1.
15-8
Reserved
7
BNK7_RET
(2) (3)
R
0h
RW
0h
6
BNK6_RET
(2) (3)
,
RW
0h
5
BNK5_RET
(2) (3)
RW
0h
4
BNK4_RET
(2) (3)
RW
0h
3
BNK3_RET
(2) (3)
,
RW
0h
2
BNK2_RET
(2) (3)
RW
0h
1
BNK1_RET
(2) (3)
0
BNK0_RET
Reserved. Reads return 0h
0b = Bank7 of the SRAM is not retained in LPM3 or LPM4
1b = Bank7 of the SRAM is retained in LPM3 or LPM4
0b = Bank6 of the SRAM is not retained in LPM3 or LPM4
1b = Bank6 of the SRAM is retained in LPM3 or LPM4
0b = Bank5 of the SRAM is not retained in LPM3 or LPM4
1b = Bank5 of the SRAM is retained in LPM3 or LPM4
0b = Bank4 of the SRAM is not retained in LPM3 or LPM4
1b = Bank4 of the SRAM is retained in LPM3 or LPM4
0b = Bank3 of the SRAM is not retained in LPM3 or LPM4
1b = Bank3 of the SRAM is retained in LPM3 or LPM4
0b = Bank2 of the SRAM is not retained in LPM3 or LPM4
1b = Bank2 of the SRAM is retained in LPM3 or LPM4
RW
0h
R
1h
0b = Bank1 of the SRAM is not retained in LPM3 or LPM4
1b = Bank1 of the SRAM is retained in LPM3 or LPM4
(1)
(2)
(3)
74
Bank0 is always retained in LPM3, LPM4 and LPM3.5 modes of operation
This bit will automatically be set to 0 whenever any of the BNKx_RET bits in this register are changed. It will set back to 1 after the
SRAM controller has recognized the new BNKx_RET values.
Value of this bit is a don't care when the device enters LPM3.5 or LPM4.5 modes of operation. It will always get reset and the SRAM
block associated with this bit will not retain its contents.
Writes to this bit are allowed ONLY when the SRAM_RDY bit of this register is set to 1. If the SRAM_RDY bit is 0, writes to this bit will
be ignored.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
6.3.3
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
ROM
The MSP432P401x devices support 32KB of ROM memory, with the rest of the 1-MB region treated as
reserved (for future upgrades). The lower 1KB of the ROM is reserved for TI internal purposes and
accesses to this space will return an error response. The rest of the ROM is used for driver libraries.
NOTE
The entire ROM region returns an error response for write accesses. The lower 1KB of the
ROM always returns an error response for any access.
6.4
DMA
For maximum flexibility, up to eight DMA event sources can map to any of the eight channels. This is
controlled through configuration registers in the DMA. In addition, the DMA can generate up to four
interrupt requests (described in Section 6.4.2). For details regarding configuration of the DMA, refer to the
DMA chapter in the MSP432P4xx Family Technical Reference Manual.
Figure 6-11 shows the block diagram of the DMA.
Figure 6-11. DMA Block Diagram
6.4.1
DMA Source Mapping
Each channel of the eight available channels has a control register that can select any of the device level
DMA sources as the final source for that corresponding channel. Table 6-8 lists the sources available for
mapping to each channel, based on the value of the Source Config Register (SRCCFG).
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
75
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The MSP432P401x devices implement an 8-channel ARM uDMA. This allows eight simultaneously active
channels for data transfer between memory and peripherals without needing to use the bandwidth of the
CPU (thereby reducing power by idling the CPU when there is no data processing required). In addition,
the DMA remains active in multiple low-power modes of operation, allowing for a very low power state in
which data can be transferred at low rates.
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-8. DMA Sources
SRCCFG = 0
SRCCFG = 1
SRCCFG = 2
SRCCFG = 3
SRCCFG = 4
SRCCFG = 5
SRCCFG = 6
SRCCFG = 7
Channel 0
Reserved
eUSCI_A0 TX
eUSCI_B0 TX0
eUSCI_B3 TX1
eUSCI_B2 TX2
eUSCI_B1 TX3
TA0CCR0
AES256_Trigge
r0
Channel 1
Reserved
eUSCI_A0 RX
eUSCI_B0 RX0
eUSCI_B3 RX1
eUSCI_B2 RX2
eUSCI_B1 RX3
TA0CCR2
AES256_Trigge
r1
Channel 2
Reserved
eUSCI_A1 TX
eUSCI_B1 TX0
eUSCI_B0 TX1
eUSCI_B3 TX2
eUSCI_B2 TX3
TA1CCR0
AES256_Trigge
r2
Channel 3
Reserved
eUSCI_A1 RX
eUSCI_B1 RX0
eUSCI_B0 RX1
eUSCI_B3 RX2
eUSCI_B2 RX3
TA1CCR2
Reserved
Channel 4
Reserved
eUSCI_A2 TX
eUSCI_B2 TX0
eUSCI_B1 TX1
eUSCI_B0 TX2
eUSCI_B3 TX3
TA2CCR0
Reserved
Channel 5
Reserved
eUSCI_A2 RX
eUSCI_B2 RX0
eUSCI_B1 RX1
eUSCI_B0 RX2
eUSCI_B3 RX3
TA2CCR2
Reserved
Channel 6
Reserved
eUSCI_A3 TX
eUSCI_B3 TX0
eUSCI_B2 TX1
eUSCI_B1 TX2
eUSCI_B0 TX3
TA3CCR0
DMAE0
(External Pin)
Channel 7
Reserved
eUSCI_A3 RX
eUSCI_B3 RX0
eUSCI_B2 RX1
eUSCI_B1 RX2
eUSCI_B0 RX3
TA3CCR2
ADC14
NOTE
Any source marked as Reserved is unused. It may be used for software-controlled DMA
tasks, but typically it is reserved for enhancement purposes on future devices.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
6.4.2
DMA Completion Interrupts
In the case of the ARM µDMA controller, it is usually the responsibility of software to maintain a list of
channels that have completed their operation. In order to provide further flexibility, the MSP432P401x
DMA supports four DMA completion interrupts, which are mapped in the following way:
• DMA_INT0: Logical OR of all completion events except those that are already mapped to DMA_INT1,
DMA_INT2, or DMA_INT3.
• DMA_INT1, DMA_INT2, DMA_INT3: Can be mapped to the DMA completion event of any of the eight
channels
NOTE
Software must ensure that DMA_INT1, DMA_INT2, and DMA_INT3 are mapped to different
channels, so that the same channel does not result in multiple interrupts at the NVIC.
6.4.3
DMA Access Privileges
The DMA has access to all the memories and peripheral configuration interfaces of the device. In the
event the device is configured for IP protection, DMA access to the flash is restricted to only the lower half
(second bank) of the flash main and information memory regions. This prevents the DMA from being used
as an unauthorized access source into the top half (first bank) of the flash, where secure data regions are
housed.
6.5
Memory Map Access Details
The bus system on the MSP432P401x devices incorporates 4 masters, which can initiate various types of
transactions
• ICODE: Cortex-M4 instruction fetch bus. Accesses the Code Zone only
• DCODE: Cortex-M4 data and literal fetch bus. Accesses the Code Zone only. Debugger accesses to
Code Zone also appear on this bus.
• SBUS: Cortex-M4 data read and write bus. Accesses to all zones except Code Zones and PPB
memory space only. Debugger accesses to this space also appear on this bus.
• DMA: Access to all zones except the PPB memory space
76
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
NOTE
The PPB space is dedicated only to the Cortex-M4 Private Peripheral Bus.
6.5.1
Master and Slave Access Priority Settings
Table 6-9 lists all the available masters (rows) and their access permissions to slaves (columns). If
multiple masters can access one slave, the table lists access priorities if arbitration is required. A lower
number in the table indicates a higher arbitration priority (the priority is always fixed).
Table 6-9. Master and Slave Access Priority
FLASH MEMORY
ROM
SRAM
PERIPHERALS
3
2
4
NA
1
2
NA
3
2
DCODE
(1)
(2)
(3)
6.5.2
2
(1)
SBUS
NA
DMA
1
NA
(2)
NA
1
(3)
1
Access from the DCODE to flash memory may be restricted if the device is operating in a secure
mode
Access from DMA to flash memory will be restricted to Bank 1 if the device is operating in a secure
mode with IP protection enabled. In such cases, access to Bank0 will return an error response
Although the SRAM is mapped to both Code and System spaces, accesses from DMA to SRAM must
use the System space addressing ONLY.
Memory Map Access Response
The following table consolidates the access responses to the entire memory map of the MSP432P401x
devices.
Table 6-10. Memory Map Access Response
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ADDRESS RANGE
DESCRIPTION
READ
0x0000_0000–0x0003_FFFF
Flash Main Memory
OK
0x0004_0000–0x001F_FFFF
Reserved
Error
0x0020_0000–0x0020_3FFF
Flash Information Memory
OK
0x0020_4000–0x00FF_FFFF
Reserved
Error
(1)
WRITE
OK
(1)
(2) (3)
,
Error
OK
(3)
Error
INSTRUCTION
FETCH (1)
OK
Error
OK
Error
0x0100_0000–0x0100_FFFF
SRAM
OK
OK
OK
0x0101_0000–0x01FF_FFFF
Reserved
Error
Error
Error
0x0200_0000–0x0200_03FF
ROM (Reserved)
Error
Error
Error
0x0200_0400–0x0200_7FFF
ROM
OK
Error
OK
0x0200_8000–0x1FFF_FFFF
Reserved
Error
Error
Error
0x2000_0000–0x2000_FFFF
SRAM
OK
OK
OK
Error
Error
Error
OK
Error
0x2001_0000–0x21FF_FFFF
Reserved
0x2200_0000–0x23FF_FFFF
SRAM bit-band alias
0x2400_0000–0x3FFF_FFFF
Reserved
Error
Error
Error
0x4000_0000–0x4001_FFFF
Peripheral
OK
OK
Error
Error
Error
Error
OK
Error
Error
Error
0x4002_0000–0x41FF_FFFF
Reserved
0x4200_0000–0x43FF_FFFF
Peripheral bit-band alias
0x4400_0000–0xDFFF_FFFF
Reserved
OK
OK
(4)
(4)
Error
A 'reserved' memory region returns 0h on reads and instruction fetches. Writes to this region are ignored.
If the User memory address is part of a secure region, this access returns an error if it is initiated by an unauthorized source. For more
details, refer to the device security application note.
Writes to this address are ignored if the concerned sector has write protection enabled.
Reads from the bit-band region return 00h if the bit is clear and 01h if the bit is set.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
77
PRODUCT PREVIEW
ICODE
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-10. Memory Map Access Response (continued)
ADDRESS RANGE
0xE000_0000–0xE003_FFFF
(5)
DESCRIPTION
READ
(5)
Internal PPB
(1)
WRITE
(1)
INSTRUCTION
FETCH (1)
OK
OK
Error
0xE004_0000–0xE004_0FFF
TPIU (External PPB)
OK
OK
Error
0xE004_1000–0xE004_1FFF
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Error
0xE004_2000–0xE004_23FF
Reset Controller (External
PPB)
OK
OK
Error
0xE004_2400–0xE004_2FFF
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Error
0xE004_3000–0xE004_33FF
SYSCTL (External PPB)
OK
OK
Error
0xE004_3400–0xE004_3FFF
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Error
0xE004_4000–0xE004_43FF
SYSCTL (External PPB)
OK
OK
Error
0xE004_4400–0xE00F_EFFF
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Error
0xE00F_F000–0xE00F_FFFF
ROM Table (External PPB)
OK
OK
Error
0xE010_0000–0xFFFF_FFFF
Reserved
Error
Error
Error
Refer to the Cortex®-M4 TRM for details of the memory map of the internal PPB.
6.6
Interrupts
PRODUCT PREVIEW
The Cortex-M4 processor on MSP432P401x devices implements an NVIC with 64 external interrupt lines
and 8 levels of priority. From an application perspective, the interrupt sources at the device level are
divided into two classes, the NMI and the User Interrupts. Internally, the CPU exception model handles the
various exceptions (internal and external events including CPU instruction, memory, and bus fault
conditions) in a fixed and configurable order of priority. For details on the handling of various exception
priorities (including CPU reset and fault models), see the ARM-V7M architecture reference manual at
www.arm.com.
6.6.1
NMI
The NMI input of the NVIC has the following possible sources
• External NMI pin (if configured in NMI mode)
• Oscillator fault condition
• Power Supply System (PSS) generated interrupts
• Power Control Manager (PCM) generated interrupts
The source that finally feeds the NMI of the NVIC is configured through the NMI Control register,
explained in Section 6.6.1.1.
78
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
6.6.1.1
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
NMI Control and Status Register [Address = E004_3004h]
Figure 6-12. SYS_NMI_CTLSTAT Register
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
Reserved
r
r
23
22
r
r
r
r
r
r
21
20
19
PIN_FLG
rw-0
18
PCM_FLG
r-0
17
PSS_FLG
r-0
16
CS_FLG
r-0
11
10
9
8
Reserved
r
r
r
r
15
14
13
12
Reserved
r
r
7
6
r
r
r
r
r
r
5
4
r
r
3
PIN_SRC
rw-0
2
PCM_SRC
rw-1
1
PSS_SRC
rw-1
0
CS_SRC
rw-1
Reserved
r
r
Table 6-11. SYS_NMI_CTLSTAT Register Description
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
31-20
Reserved
R
0h
19
PIN_FLG
RW
0h
18
PCM_FLG
R
0h
DESCRIPTION
Reserved. Reads return 0h
0b = Indicates the RSTn/NMI pin was not the source of NMI
1b = Indicates the RSTn/NMI pin was the source of NMI
0b = Indicates the PCM interrupt was not the source of NMI
1b = Indicates the PCM interrupt was the source of NMI
This flag gets auto-cleared when the corresponding source flag in the PCM is
cleared
17
PSS_FLG
R
0h
0b = Indicates the PSS interrupt was not the source of NMI
1b = Indicates the PSS interrupt was the source of NMI
This flag gets auto-cleared when the corresponding source flag in the PSS is
cleared
16
CS_FLG
R
0h
0b = Indicates CS interrupt was not the source of NMI
1b = Indicates CS interrupt was the source of NMI
This flag gets auto-cleared when the corresponding source flag in the CS is
cleared
15-4
Reserved
R
0h
3
PIN_SRC (1) (2)
RW
0h
Reserved. Reads return 0h
0b = Configures the RSTn/NMI pin as a source of POR Class Reset
1b = Configures the RSTn/NMI pin as a source of NMI
Note: Setting this bit to 1 prevents the RSTn pin from being used as a reset.
An NMI is triggered by the pin only if a negative edge is detected.
2
PCM_SRC
RW
1h
0b = Disbles the PCM interrupt as a source of NMI
1b = Enables the PCM interrupt as a source of NMI
1
PSS_SRC
RW
1h
0b = Disables the PSS interrupt as a source of NMI
1b = Enables the PSS interrupt as a source of NMI
(1)
(2)
When the device enters LPM3/LPM4 modes of operation, the functionality selected by this bit will be retained. If selected as an NMI,
activity on this pin in LPM3/LPM4 will wake the device and process the interrupt, without causing a POR. If selected as a Reset, activity
on this pin in LPM3/LPM4 will cause a device level POR
When the device enters LPM3.5/LPM4.5 modes of operation, this bit will always be cleared to 0. In other words, the RSTn/NMI pin will
always assume a reset functionality in LPM3.5/LPM4.5 modes.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
79
PRODUCT PREVIEW
BIT
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-11. SYS_NMI_CTLSTAT Register Description (continued)
BIT
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
0
CS_SRC
RW
1h
DESCRIPTION
0b = Disables CS interrupt as a source of NMI
1b = Enables CS interrupt as a source of NMI
6.6.2
Device-Level User Interrupts
Table 6-12 lists the various interrupt sources and their connection to the NVIC inputs
NOTE
Some sources may have multiple interrupt conditions, in which case the appropriate interrupt
status/flag register of the source must be examined to differentiate between the generating
conditions.
Table 6-12. NVIC Interrupts
NVIC INTERRUPT INPUT
PRODUCT PREVIEW
INTISR[1]
CS
INTISR[2]
PCM
INTISR[4]
80
FLAGS IN SOURCE
(1)
PSS
INTISR[3]
(1)
(2)
SOURCE
INTISR[0]
(1)
(1)
WDT_A
FPU_INT
(2)
Combined interrupt from flags in the FPSCR (part of Cortex-M4 FPU)
INTISR[5]
Flash Controller
Flash Controller interrupt flags
INTISR[6]
COMP_E0
Comparator_E0 interrupt flags
INTISR[7]
COMP_E1
Comparator_E1 interrupt flags
INTISR[8]
Timer_A0
TA0CCTL0.CCIFG
TA0CCTLx.CCIFG (x = 1 through 4), TA0CTL.TAIFG
INTISR[9]
Timer_A0
INTISR[10]
Timer_A1
TA1CCTL0.CCIFG
INTISR[11]
Timer_A1
TA1CCTLx.CCIFG (x = 1 through 4), TA1CTL.TAIFG
INTISR[12]
Timer_A2
TA2CCTL0.CCIFG
INTISR[13]
Timer_A2
TA2CCTLx.CCIFG (x = 1 through 4), TA2CTL.TAIFG
INTISR[14]
Timer_A3
TA3CCTL0.CCIFG
INTISR[15]
Timer_A3
TA3CCTLx.CCIFG (x = 1 through 4), TA3CTL.TAIFG
INTISR[16]
eUSCI_A0
UART/SPI mode Tx/Rx/Status Flags
INTISR[17]
eUSCI_A1
UART/SPI mode Tx/Rx/Status Flags
INTISR[18]
eUSCI_A2
UART/SPI mode Tx/Rx/Status Flags
INTISR[19]
eUSCI_A3
UART/SPI mode Tx/Rx/Status Flags
INTISR[20]
eUSCI_B0
SPI/I2C mode Tx/Rx/Status Flags (I2C in multi-slave mode)
INTISR[21]
eUSCI_B1
SPI/I2C mode Tx/Rx/Status Flags (I2C in multi-slave mode)
INTISR[22]
eUSCI_B2
SPI/I2C mode Tx/Rx/Status Flags (I2C in multi-slave mode)
INTISR[23]
eUSCI_B3
SPI/I2C mode Tx/Rx/Status Flags (I2C in multi-slave mode)
INTISR[24]
ADC14
IFG[0-31], LO/IN/HI-IFG, RDYIFG, OVIFG, TOVIFG
INTISR[25]
Timer32_INT1
Timer32 Interrupt for Timer1
INTISR[26]
Timer32_INT2
Timer32 Interrupt for Timer2
INTISR[27]
Timer32_INTC
Timer32 Combined Interrupt
INTISR[28]
AES256
AESRDYIFG
INTISR[29]
RTC_C
OFIFG, RDYIFG, TEVIFG, AIFG, RT0PSIFG, RT1PSIFG
INTISR[30]
DMA_ERR
DMA error interrupt
This source can also be mapped to the system NMI. Refer to the MSP432P4xx Family Technical Reference Manual for more details.
The FPU of the Cortex-M4 can generate interrupts due to multiple floating point exceptions. It is the responsibility of software to process
and clear the interrupt flags in the FPSCR.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 6-12. NVIC Interrupts (continued)
SOURCE
FLAGS IN SOURCE
INTISR[31]
DMA_INT3
DMA completion interrupt3
INTISR[32]
DMA_INT2
DMA completion interrupt2
INTISR[33]
DMA_INT1
DMA completion interrupt1
INTISR[34]
DMA_INT0 (3)
DMA completion interrupt0
INTISR[35]
I/O Port P1
P1IFG.x (x = 0 through 7)
INTISR[36]
I/O Port P2
P2IFG.x (x = 0 through 7)
INTISR[37]
I/O Port P3
P3IFG.x (x = 0 through 7)
INTISR[38]
I/O Port P4
P4IFG.x (x = 0 through 7)
INTISR[39]
I/O Port P5
P5IFG.x (x = 0 through 7)
INTISR[40]
I/O Port P6
P6IFG.x (x = 0 through 7)
INTISR[41]
Reserved
INTISR[42]
Reserved
INTISR[43]
Reserved
INTISR[44]
Reserved
INTISR[45]
Reserved
INTISR[46]
Reserved
INTISR[47]
Reserved
INTISR[48]
Reserved
INTISR[49]
Reserved
INTISR[50]
Reserved
INTISR[51]
Reserved
INTISR[52]
Reserved
INTISR[53]
Reserved
INTISR[54]
Reserved
INTISR[55]
Reserved
INTISR[56]
Reserved
INTISR[57]
Reserved
INTISR[58]
Reserved
INTISR[59]
Reserved
INTISR[60]
Reserved
INTISR[61]
Reserved
INTISR[62]
Reserved
INTISR[63]
Reserved
(3)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NVIC INTERRUPT INPUT
DMA_INT0 has a different functionality from DMA_INT1/2/3. Refer to Section 6.4.2 for more details.
NOTE
The Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) must ensure that the relevant interrupt flag in the source
peripheral is cleared before returning from the ISR. If this is not done, the same interrupt
may get incorrectly pended again as a new event, even though the event has already been
processed by the ISR. As there may be a few cycles of delay between the execution of the
write command and the actual write reflecting in the peripheral's interrupt flag register, the
recommendation is to carry out the write and wait for a few cycles before exiting the ISR.
Alternatively, the application can do an explicit read to ensure that the flag was cleared
before exiting the ISR.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
81
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.7
www.ti.com
System Control
System Control comprises the modules that govern the overall behavior of the device, including power
management, operating modes, clocks, reset handling, and user configuration settings.
6.7.1
Device Resets
The MSP432P401x devices support multiple classes of reset. Each class results in a different level of
initiation of device logic, thus offering the application developer the capability of initiating different resets
based reset requirements during code development and debug. The following subsections cover the
classes of reset in the device
6.7.1.1
Power On/Off Reset (POR)
The POR initiates a complete initialization of the application settings and device configuration information.
This class of reset may be initiated either by the PSS, the PCM, the RSTn pin, the Clock System upon
DCO external resistor short circuit fault or the device emulation logic (through the debugger). From an
application perspective, all sources of POR return the device to the same state of initialization.
NOTE
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Depending on the source of the reset, the device may exhibit different wake-up latencies
from the POR. This implementation enables optimization of the reset recovery time.
6.7.1.2
Reboot Reset
The Reboot Reset is identical to the POR, and allows the application to emulate a POR class reset
without needing to power cycle the device or activating the RSTn pin. It can also be initiated through the
debugger, and hence does not affect the debug connection to the device. On the other hand, a POR will
result in a debug disconnect.
6.7.1.2.1 Reboot Control Register (Address = E004_3000h)
Figure 6-13. SYS_REBOOT_CTL Register
31
30
29
28
27
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
24
23
Reserved
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
15
14
13
12
11
WKEY
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
Reserved
3
2
1
w
w
w
w
w
w
w
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
0
REBO
OT
w
w
26
25
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Table 6-13. SYS_REBOOT_CTL Register Description
BIT
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
DESCRIPTION
31-16
Reserved
R
0h
Reserved. Reads return 0h
15-8
WKEY
W
0h
Key to enable writes to bit 0. Bit 0 is written only if WKEY is 69h in the same
write cycle
7-1
Reserved
R
0h
Reserved. Reads return 0h
0
REBOOT
W
0h
Write 1 initiates a Reboot of the device
82
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
6.7.1.3
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Hard Reset
The Hard Reset resets all modules that are set up or modified by the application. This includes all
peripherals as well as the non debug logic of the Cortex-M4. The MSP432P401x devices support up to 16
sources of Hard Reset. The following table lists the reset source allocation. The Reset Controller registers
can be used to identify the possible source of reset in the device. For further details, refer to Reset
Controller chapter in the MSP432P4xx Family Technical Reference Manual (SLAU356).
Table 6-14. MSP432P401x Hard Reset Sources
RESET SOURCE
NUMBER
SOURCE
0
SYSRESETREQ (System reset output of Cortex-M4)
(3)
(4)
(5)
WDT_A Time-out
2
WDT_A Password Violation
3
Flash Controller
4
Reserved
(3)
5
Reserved
(3)
6
Reserved
(3)
7
Reserved
(3)
8
Reserved
(3)
9
Reserved
(3)
10
Reserved
(3)
11
Reserved
(3)
12
Reserved
(3)
13
Reserved
(3)
14
CS
(4)
15
PCM
(1)
(2)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
(1)
(2)
(1)
1
(5)
The WDT_A generated resets can be mapped either as a Hard Reset or a Soft Reset.
The Flash Controller can generate a reset if a voltage anomaly is detected that can corrupt only flash
reads, and not the rest of the system.
'Reserved' indicates that this source of Hard Reset is currently unused and left for future expansion.
The CS is technically not a true source of a Hard Reset, but if a Hard Reset occurs during clock
source/frequency changes, it may extend the reset to allow the clocks to settle before releasing the
system. This prevents chances of nondeterministic behavior.
The PCM is technically not a true source of a Hard Reset, but if a Hard Reset causes power mode
changes, it may extend the reset to allow the system to settle before releasing the Reset. This
prevents chances of nondeterministic behavior.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
83
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.7.1.4
www.ti.com
Soft Reset
The Soft Reset resets only the execution component of the system, which is the non debug logic in the
Cortex-M4 and the WDT_A. This reset remains nonintrusive to all other peripherals and system
components. The MSP432P401x devices support up to 16 sources of Soft Reset. The following table lists
the reset source allocation. The Reset Controller registers can be used to identify the possible source of
reset in the design. For further details, refer to Reset Controller chapter in the MSP432P4xx Family
Technical Reference Manual (SLAU356).
Table 6-15. MSP432P401x Soft Reset Sources
RESET SOURCE
NUMBER
SOURCE
0
CPU LOCKUP Condition (LOCKUP output of Cortex-M4)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
(1)
(2)
(1)
1
WDT_A Time-out
2
WDT_A Password Violation
3
Reserved
(2)
4
Reserved
(2)
5
Reserved
(2)
6
Reserved
(2)
7
Reserved
(2)
8
Reserved
(2)
9
Reserved
(2)
10
Reserved
(2)
11
Reserved
(2)
12
Reserved
(2)
13
Reserved
(2)
14
Reserved
(2)
15
Reserved
(2)
(1)
The WDT_A generated resets can be mapped either as a Hard Reset or a Soft Reset.
'Reserved' indicates that this source of Soft Reset is currently unused and left for future expansion.
NOTE
To support and enhance debug of reset conditions, the Reset Controller is located on the
PPB of the device. This allows the Reset Controller to remain accessible even if the device is
stuck in a Hard or Soft reset state. The Reset Controller permits overrides for Hard and Soft
resets, thereby allowing regaining control of the device and isolating the cause of the stuck
reset.
6.7.2
Power Supply System (PSS)
The PSS controls all the power supply related functionality of the device. It consists of the following
components
6.7.2.1
VCCDET
The VCCDET monitors the input voltage applied at the DVCC and AVCC pins of the device. When the
VCC is found to be below the operating range of the VCCDET trip points, it generates a brownout
condition, thereby initiating a device reset (POR class reset).
84
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
6.7.2.2
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Supply Supervisor and Monitor for High Side (SVSMH)
The SVSMH supervises and monitors the VCC. SVSMH has a programmable threshold setting and can be
used by the application to generate a reset or an interrupt if the VCC dips below the desired threshold. In
supervisor mode, the SVSMH generates a device reset (POR class reset). In monitor mode, the SVSMH
generates an interrupt. The SVSMH can also be disabled if monitoring and supervision of the supply
voltage are not required (offers further power savings).
6.7.2.3
Core Voltage Regulator
The MSP432P401x devices can be programmed to operate either with an LDO or with a DC-DC as the
voltage regulator for the digital logic in the core domain of the device. The DC-DC offers significant boost
in power efficiency for high-current high-performance applications. The LDO is a highly efficient regulator
that offers power advantages at lower VCC ranges and in the ultra-low-power modes of operation.
The core operating voltage (output of the LDO or DC-DC) is automatically set by the device depending on
the selected operating mode of the device (refer to Table 6-16 for further details). The device offers
seamless switching between LDO and DC-DC operating modes and also implements a seamless DC-DC
fail-safe mechanism.
Supply Supervisor for Low Side (SVSL)
The SVSL monitors the low-side (core domain) voltage of the device (also available at the VCORE pin). If
the core voltage drops below the trip threshold of the SVSL, the SVSL generates a device reset (POR
class reset). The SVSL can also be disabled if supervision of the core voltage is not required (offers
further power savings).
6.7.3
Power Control Manager (PCM)
The PCM controls the operating modes of the device and the switching between the modes. This is
controlled by the application, which can choose modes to meet its power and performance requirements.
Table 6-16 lists the operating modes of the device.
Table 6-16. MSP432P401x Operating Modes
OPERATING MODE
AM_LDO_VCORE0
LPM0_LDO_VCORE0
AM_LDO_VCORE1
DESCRIPTION
LDO based active mode, medium performance, core voltage level 0
Same as above, except that CPU is OFF (no code execution)
LDO based active mode, maximum performance, core voltage level 1
LPM0_LDO_VCORE1
Same as above, except that CPU is OFF (no code execution)
AM_DCDC_VCORE0
DC-DC based active mode, medium performance, core voltage level 0
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE0
AM_DCDC_VCORE1
LPM0_DCDC_VCORE1
AM_LF_VCORE0
LPM0_LF_VCORE0
AM_LF_VCORE1
LPM0_LF_VCORE1
Same as above, except that CPU is OFF (no code execution)
DC-DC based active mode, maximum performance, core voltage level 1
Same as above, except that CPU is OFF (no code execution)
LDO based low frequency active mode, core voltage level 0
Same as above, except that CPU is OFF (no code execution)
LDO based low frequency active mode, core voltage level 1
Same as above, except that CPU is OFF (no code execution)
LPM3_VCORE0
LDO based low-power mode with full state retention, core voltage level 0, RTC and WDT can be active
LPM3_VCORE1
LDO based low-power mode with full state retention, core voltage level 1, RTC and WDT can be active
LPM4_VCORE0
LDO based low-power mode with full state retention, core voltage level 0, all peripherals disabled.
LPM4_VCORE1
LDO based low-power mode with full state retention, core voltage level 1, all peripherals disabled
LPM3.5
LDO based low-power mode, core voltage level 0, no retention of peripheral registers, RTC and WDT can be
active
LPM4.5
Core voltage turned off, wake-up only through Pin Reset or Wake-up capable I/O's
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
85
PRODUCT PREVIEW
6.7.2.4
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.7.4
www.ti.com
Clock System (CS)
The CS contains the sources of the various clocks in the device and also controls the mapping between
sources and the clock domains in the device.
6.7.4.1
LFXT
The LFXT supports 32.768-kHz low-frequency crystals.
6.7.4.2
HFXT
The HFXT supports high-frequency crystals up to 48 MHz.
6.7.4.3
DCO
The DCO is a power-efficient tunable internal oscillator that generates up to 48 MHz. It also supports a
high-precision mode when using an external precision resistor.
6.7.4.4
Very Low-Power Low-Frequency Oscillator (VLO)
The VLO is an ultra-low-power internal oscillator that generates a low-accuracy clock at typical frequency
of 9.4 kHz.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
6.7.4.5
Low Frequency Reference Oscillator (REFO)
The REFO can be used as an alternate low-power lower-accuracy source of a 32.768-kHz clock instead of
the LFXT. REFO can also be programmed to generate a 128-kHz clock.
6.7.4.6
Module Oscillator (MODOSC)
The MODOSC is an internal clock source that has a very low latency wake-up time. MODOSC is factorycalibrated to a frequency of 25 MHz. It is typically used to supply a 'clock on request' to modules like the
ADC (when in 1-Msps conversion mode).
6.7.4.7
System Oscillator (SYSOSC)
The SYSOSC is a lower-frequency version of the MODOSC and is factory calibrated to a frequency of 5
MHz. It drives the ADC sampling clock in the 200-ksps conversion mode. In addition, it is also used for
timing of various system-level control and management operations.
6.7.4.8
Fail-Safe Mechanisms
All clock sources that operate with external components have a built-in fail-safe mechanism that
automatically switches to the relevant backup source, thereby ensuring that spurious or unstable clocks
never impact the device behavior.
86
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
6.7.5
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
System Controller (SYSCTL)
The SYSCTL is a set of various miscellaneous features of the device, including SRAM bank configuration,
RSTn/NMI function selection, and peripheral halt control. In addition, the SYSCTL enables device security
features like JTAG and SWD lock and IP protection, which can be used to protect unauthorized accesses
either to the entire device memory map or to certain selected regions of the flash. Table 6-17 lists the
registers that are part of SYSCTL. Only the offsets of the registers are listed—the entire addresses are
listed with the complete register definitions elsewhere this data sheet.
OFFSET
ACRONYM
REGISTER NAME
SECTION
000h
SYS_REBOOT_CTL
Reboot Control Register
Section 6.7.1.2.1
004h
SYS_NMI_CTLSTAT
NMI Control and Status Register
Section 6.6.1.1
008h
SYS_WDTRESET_CTL
Watchdog Reset Control Register
Section 6.8.7.1
00Ch
SYS_PERIHALT_CTL
Peripheral Halt Control Register
Section 6.9.2
010h
SYS_SRAM_SIZE
SRAM Size Register
Section 6.3.2.3.1
014h
SYS_SRAM_BANKEN
SRAM Bank Enable Register
Section 6.3.2.3.2
018h
SYS_SRAM_BANKRET
SRAM Bank Retention Control Register
Section 6.3.2.3.3
020h
SYS_FLASH_SIZE
Flash Size Register
Section 6.3.1.1.1
030h
SYS_DIO_GLTFLT_CTL
Digital I/O Glitch Filter Control Register
Section 6.8.1.1.1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 6-17. SYSCTL Registers
NOTE
As is the case with the Cortex-M4 system control registers (housed on the internal PPB
space), the System Controller module registers are mapped to the Cortex-M4 external PPB.
This keeps the System Controller module accessible even when the Hard and/or Soft resets
are active.
6.8
Peripherals
6.8.1
Digital I/O
There are up to 10 8-bit I/O ports implemented:
• All individual I/O bits are independently programmable.
• Any combination of input, output, and interrupt conditions is possible.
• Programmable pullup or pulldown on all ports.
• Edge-selectable interrupt capability is available on ports P1 through P6.
• Wake-up capability from LPM3, LPM4, LPM3.5, and LPM4.5 modes over ports P1 through P6.
• Read/write access to port-control registers is supported by all instructions.
• Ports can be accessed byte-wise or in pairs (16bit widths).
• Capacitive Touch functionality is supported on all pins of ports P1 through P10 and PJ.
• Glitch filtering capability on selected digital I/Os.
6.8.1.1
Glitch Filtering on Digital I/Os
Some of the interrupt and wake-up capable digital I/Os have the capability to suppress glitches through
the use of analog glitch filter to prevent unintentional interrupt or wake-up during device operation. The
analog filter will suppress a minimum of 250ns wide glitches. The glitch filter on these selected digital I/Os
is enabled by default. If the glitch filtering capability is not required in the application there is a provision to
bypass them by programming the SYS_DIO_GLTFLT_CTL register. When GLTFLT_EN bit in this register
is cleared then glitch filters on all the digital I/Os are bypassed at once. The glitch filter is automatically
bypassed on a digital I/O when it is configured for peripheral or analog functionality by programming the
respective PySEL0.x, PySEL1.x registers.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
87
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
NOTE
The glitch filter is implemented on the following digital I/Os on MSP432P401x devices: P1.0,
P1.4, P1.5, P3.0, P3.4, P3.5, P6.6, P6.7.
6.8.1.1.1 Digital I/O Glitch Filter Control Register [Address = E004_0030h]
Figure 6-14. SYS_DIO_GLTFLT_CTL Register
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
Reserved
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Reserved
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
0
GLTFL
T_EN
rw-1
Table 6-18. SYS_DIO_GLTFLT_CTL Register Description
PRODUCT PREVIEW
BIT
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
DESCRIPTION
31-1
Reserved
R
0h
Reserved. Always reads 0h.
0
GLTFLT_EN
RW
1h
0b = Disables glitch filter on the digital I/Os.
1b = Enables glitch filter on the digital I/Os.
6.8.2
Port Mapping Controller (PMAPCTL)
The port mapping controller allows flexible and reconfigurable mapping of digital functions.
6.8.2.1
Port Mapping Definitions
The port mapping controller on MSP432P401x devices allows reconfigurable mapping of digital functions
over ports P2, P3, and P7.
Table 6-19. Port Mapping, Mnemonics, and Functions
VALUE
PxMAPy MNEMONIC
INPUT PIN FUNCTION
OUTPUT PIN FUNCTION
0
PM_NONE
None
DVSS
1
2
3
4
5
eUSCI_A0 clock input/output (direction controlled by eUSCI)
eUSCI_A0 UART RXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – Input)
PM_UCA0SOMI
eUSCI_A0 SPI slave out master in (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCA0TXD
eUSCI_A0 UART TXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – Output)
PM_UCA0SIMO
eUSCI_A0 SPI slave in master out (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCB0CLK
eUSCI_B0 clock input/output (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCB0SDA
eUSCI_B0 I2C data (open drain and direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCB0SIMO
eUSCI_B0 SPI slave in master out (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCB0SCL
eUSCI_B0 I2C clock (open drain and direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCB0SOMI
eUSCI_B0 SPI slave out master in (direction controlled by eUSCI)
7
PM_UCA1STE
eUSCI_A1 SPI slave transmit enable (direction controlled by eUSCI)
8
PM_UCA1CLK
eUSCI_A1 clock input/output (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCA1RXD
eUSCI_A1 UART RXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – Input)
PM_UCA1SOMI
eUSCI_A1 SPI slave out master in (direction controlled by eUSCI)
6
9
10
11
88
PM_UCA0CLK
PM_UCA0RXD
PM_UCA1TXD
eUSCI_A1 UART TXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – Output)
PM_UCA1SIMO
eUSCI_A1 SPI slave in master out (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCA2STE
eUSCI_A2 SPI slave transmit enable (direction controlled by eUSCI)
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 6-19. Port Mapping, Mnemonics, and Functions (continued)
VALUE
PxMAPy MNEMONIC
12
PM_UCA2CLK
14
PM_UCA2RXD
eUSCI_A2 UART RXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – Input)
PM_UCA2SOMI
eUSCI_A2 SPI slave out master in (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCA2TXD
eUSCI_A2 UART TXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – Output)
PM_ UCA2SIMO
eUSCI_A2 SPI slave in master out (direction controlled by eUSCI)
15
PM_UCB2STE
eUSCI_B2 SPI slave transmit enable (direction controlled by eUSCI)
16
PM_UCB2CLK
eUSCI_B2 clock input/output (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCB2SDA
eUSCI_B2 I2C data (open drain and direction controlled by eUSCI)
17
18
PM_UCB2SIMO
eUSCI_B2 SPI slave in master out (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCB2SCL
eUSCI_B2 I2C clock (open drain and direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_UCB2SOMI
eUSCI_B2 SPI slave out master in (direction controlled by eUSCI)
19
PM_TA0.0
TA0 CCR0 capture input CCI0A
TA0 CCR0 compare output Out0
20
PM_TA0.1
TA0 CCR1 capture input CCI1A
TA0 CCR1 compare output Out1
21
PM_TA0.2
TA0 CCR2 capture input CCI2A
TA0 CCR2 compare output Out2
22
PM_TA0.3
TA0 CCR3 capture input CCI3A
TA0 CCR3 compare output Out3
23
PM_TA0.4
TA0 CCR4 capture input CCI4A
TA0 CCR4 compare output Out4
24
PM_TA1.1
TA1 CCR1 capture input CCI1A
TA1 CCR1 compare output Out1
25
PM_TA1.2
TA1 CCR2 capture input CCI2A
TA1 CCR2 compare output Out2
26
PM_TA1.3
TA1 CCR3 capture input CCI3A
TA1 CCR3 compare output Out3
27
PM_TA1.4
TA1 CCR4 capture input CCI4A
TA1 CCR4 compare output Out4
PM_TA0CLK
Timer_A0 external clock input
None
Comparator-E0 output
28
29
30
31 (0FFh) (1)
(1)
OUTPUT PIN FUNCTION
eUSCI_A2 clock input/output (direction controlled by eUSCI)
PM_C0OUT
None
PM_TA1CLK
Timer_A1 external clock input
None
PM_C1OUT
None
Comparator-E1 output
PM_DMAE0
DMAE0 input
None
PM_SMCLK
None
SMCLK
Disables the output driver as well as the input Schmitt-trigger to prevent parasitic cross
currents when applying analog signals.
PM_ANALOG
The value of the PM_ANALOG mnemonic is set to 31. The port mapping registers are 5 bits wide, and the upper bits are ignored, which
results in a read value of 31.
Table 6-20. Default Mapping
PIN NAME
PxMAPy MNEMONIC
INPUT PIN FUNCTION
OUTPUT PIN FUNCTION
P2.0/PM_UCA1STE
PM_UCA1STE
P2.1/PM_UCA1CLK
PM_UCA1CLK
eUSCI_A1 SPI slave transmit enable (direction controlled by eUSCI)
eUSCI_A1 clock input/output (direction controlled by eUSCI)
P2.2/PM_UCA1RXD/
PM_UCA1SOMI
PM_UCA1RXD/
PM_UCA1SOMI
eUSCI_A1 UART RXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – Input)
eUSCI_A1 SPI slave out master in (direction controlled by eUSCI)
P2.3/PM_UCA1TXD/
PM_UCA1SIMO
PM_UCA1TXD/
PM_UCA1SIMO
eUSCI_A1 UART TXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – output)/
eUSCI_A1 SPI slave in master out (direction controlled by eUSCI)
P2.4/PM_TA0.1 (1)
PM_TA0.1
TA0 CCR1 capture input CCI1A
TA0 CCR1 compare output Out1
(1)
PM_TA0.2
TA0 CCR2 capture input CCI2A
TA0 CCR2 compare output Out2
P2.6/PM_TA0.3 (1)
PM_TA0.3
TA0 CCR3 capture input CCI3A
TA0 CCR3 compare output Out3
P2.7/PM_TA0.4 (1)
PM_TA0.4
TA0 CCR4 capture input CCI4A
TA0 CCR4 compare output Out4
P2.5/PM_TA0.2
P3.0/PM_UCA2STE
PM_UCA2STE
P3.1/PM_UCA2CLK
PM_UCA2CLK
eUSCI_A2 clock input/output (direction controlled by eUSCI)
P3.2/PM_UCA2RXD/
PM_UCA2SOMI
PM_UCA2RXD/
PM_UCA2SOMI
eUSCI_A2 UART RXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – input)/
eUSCI_A2 SPI slave out master in (direction controlled by eUSCI)
(1)
eUSCI_A2 SPI slave transmit enable (direction controlled by eUSCI)
Not available on the 64-pin RGC package.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
89
PRODUCT PREVIEW
13
INPUT PIN FUNCTION
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-20. Default Mapping (continued)
PIN NAME
PxMAPy MNEMONIC
INPUT PIN FUNCTION
OUTPUT PIN FUNCTION
P3.3/PM_UCA2TXD/
PM_UCA2SIMO
PM_UCA2TXD/
PM_UCA2SIMO
eUSCI_A2 UART TXD (direction controlled by eUSCI – output)/
eUSCI_A2 SPI slave in master out (direction controlled by eUSCI)
P3.4/PM_UCB2STE
PM_UCB2STE
eUSCI_B2 SPI slave transmit enable (direction controlled by eUSCI)
P3.5/PM_UCB2CLK
PM_UCB2CLK
eUSCI_B2 clock input/output (direction controlled by eUSCI)
P3.6/PM_UCB2SIMO/
PM_UCB2SDA
PM_UCB2SIMO/
PM_UCB2SDA
eUSCI_B2 SPI slave in master out (direction controlled by eUSCI)/
eUSCI_B2 I2C data (open drain and direction controlled by eUSCI)
P3.7/PM_UCB2SOMI/
PM_UCB2SCL
PM_UCB2SOMI/
PM_UCB2SCL
eUSCI_B2 SPI slave out master in (direction controlled by eUSCI)/
eUSCI_B2 I2C clock (open drain and direction controlled by eUSCI)
P7.0/PM_SMCLK/
PM_DMAE0
PM_SMCLK/
PM_DMAE0
DMAE0 input
SMCLK
P7.1/PM_C0OUT/
PM_TA0CLK
PM_C0OUT/
PM_TA0CLK
Timer_A0 external clock input
Comparator-E0 output
P7.2/PM_C1OUT/
PM_TA1CLK
PM_C1OUT/
PM_TA1CLK
Timer_A1 external clock input
Comparator-E1 output
P7.3/PM_TA0.0
PM_TA0.0
TA0 CCR0 capture input CCI0A
TA0 CCR0 compare output Out0
(1)
PM_TA1.4
TA1 CCR4 capture input CCI4A
TA1 CCR4 compare output Out4
P7.5/PM_TA1.3/C0.4 (1)
PM_TA1.3
TA1 CCR3 capture input CCI3A
TA1 CCR3 compare output Out3
P7.6/PM_TA1.2/C0.3 (1)
PM_TA1.2
TA1 CCR2 capture input CCI2A
TA1 CCR2 compare output Out2
(1)
PM_TA1.1
TA1 CCR1 capture input CCI1A
TA1 CCR1 compare output Out1
P7.4/PM_TA1.4/C0.5
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P7.7/PM_TA1.1/C0.2
6.8.3
Timer_A
Timers TA0, TA1, TA2 and TA3 are 16-bit timers/counters (Timer_A type) with five capture/compare
registers each. Each timer supports multiple capture/compares, PWM outputs, and interval timing. Each
has extensive interrupt capabilities. Interrupts may be generated from the counter on overflow conditions
and from each of the capture/compare registers.
6.8.3.1
Timer_A Signal Connection Tables
Table 6-21 through Table 6-24 list the interface signals of the Timer_A modules on the device and
connections of the interface signals to the corresponding pins or internal signals. The following rules apply
to the naming conventions used.
• The first column lists the device level pin or internal signal that sources the clocks and/or triggers into
the Timer. The default assumption is that these are pins, unless specifically marked as (internal).
Nomenclature used for internal signals is as follows:
– CxOUT: output from Comparator 'x'.
– TAx_Cy: Output from Timer 'x', Capture/Compare module 'y'.
• The second column lists the input signals of the Timer module.
• The third column lists the submodule of the Timer and also implies the functionality (Timer, Capture
(Inputs or Triggers), or Compare (Outputs or PWM)).
• The fourth column lists the output signals of the Timer module.
• The fifth column lists the device level pin or internal signal that is driven by the outputs of the Timer.
The default assumption is that these are pins, unless specifically marked as (internal).
NOTE
The pin names listed in the tables are the complete names. It is the responsibility of the
software to ensure that the pin is used in the intended mode for the targeted Timer
functionality.
90
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
NOTE
Internal signals that are sourced by the Timer outputs may connect to other modules (other
Timers, ADC, etc) in the device (as trigger sources).
Table 6-21. TA0 Signal Connections
MODULE INPUT
SIGNAL
P7.1/PM_C0OUT/PM_TA0CLK
TACLK
ACLK (internal)
ACLK
SMCLK (internal)
SMCLK
C0OUT (internal)
INCLK
P7.3/PM_TA0.0
CCI0A
DVSS
CCI0B
DVSS
GND
MODULE
BLOCK
MODULE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
DEVICE OUTPUT PIN OR
INTERNAL SIGNAL
Timer
N/A
N/A
CCR0
TA0
P7.3/PM_TA0.0
TA0_C0 (internal)
DVCC
VCC
P2.4/PM_TA0.1
CCI1A
ACLK (internal)
CCI1B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
ADC14SHSx = {1}
P2.5/PM_TA0.2
CCI2A
P2.5/PM_TA0.2
C0OUT (internal)
CCI2B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P2.6/PM_TA0.3
CCI3A
C1OUT (internal)
CCI3B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P2.7/PM_TA0.4
CCI4A
TA1_C4 (Internal)
CCI4B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P2.4/PM_TA0.1
CCR1
CCR2
TA1
TA2
TA0_C1 (internal)
ADC14 (internal)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
DEVICE INPUT PIN OR INTERNAL
SIGNAL
TA0_C2 (internal)
ADC14 (internal)
ADC14SHSx = {2}
CCR3
TA3
P2.6/PM_TA0.3
TA0_C3 (internal)
CCR4
TA4
P2.7/PM_TA0.4
TA0_C4 (internal)
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
91
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-22. TA1 Signal Connections
DEVICE INPUT PIN OR INTERNAL
SIGNAL
MODULE INPUT
SIGNAL
P7.2/PM_C1OUT/PM_TA1CLK
TACLK
ACLK (internal)
ACLK
SMCLK (internal)
SMCLK
PRODUCT PREVIEW
92
C1OUT (internal)
INCLK
P8.0/UCB3STE/TA1.0/C0.1
CCI0A
DVSS
CCI0B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P7.7/PM_TA1.1/C0.2
CCI1A
ACLK (internal)
CCI1B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P7.6/PM_TA1.2/C0.3
CCI2A
C0OUT (internal)
CCI2B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P7.5/PM_TA1.3/C0.4
CCI3A
C1OUT (internal)
CCI3B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P7.4/PM_TA1.4/C0.5
CCI4A
TA0_C4 (internal)
CCI4B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
Detailed Description
MODULE
BLOCK
MODULE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
DEVICE OUTPUT PIN OR
INTERNAL SIGNAL
Timer
N/A
N/A
CCR0
TA0
P8.0/UCB3STE/TA1.0/C0.1
TA1_C0 (internal)
CCR1
TA1
P7.7/PM_TA1.1/C0.2
TA1_C1 (internal)
ADC14 (internal)
ADC14SHSx = {3}
CCR2
TA2
P7.6/PM_TA1.2/C0.3
TA1_C2 (internal)
ADC14 (internal)
ADC14SHSx = {4}
CCR3
TA3
P7.5/PM_TA1.3/C0.4
TA1_C3 (internal)
CCR4
TA4
P7.4/PM_TA1.4/C0.5
TA1_C4 (internal)
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
DEVICE INPUT PIN OR INTERNAL
SIGNAL
MODULE INPUT
SIGNAL
P4.2/ACLK/TA2CLK/A11
TACLK
ACLK (internal)
ACLK
SMCLK (internal)
SMCLK
From Capacitive Touch I/O 0
(internal)
INCLK
P8.1/UCB3CLK/TA2.0/C0.0
CCI0A
DVSS
CCI0B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P5.6/TA2.1/VREF+/VeREF+/C1.7
CCI1A
ACLK (internal)
CCI1B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P5.7/TA2.2/VREF-/VeREF-/C1.6
CCI2A
C0OUT (internal)
CCI2B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P6.6/TA2.3/UCB3SIMO/UCB3SDA/C
1.1
CCI3A
TA3_C3 (internal)
CCI3B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P6.7/TA2.4/UCB3SOMI/UCB3SCL/C
1.0
CCI4A
From Capacitive Touch I/O 0
(internal)
CCI4B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
MODULE
BLOCK
MODULE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
DEVICE OUTPUT PIN OR
INTERNAL SIGNAL
Timer
N/A
N/A
CCR0
TA0
P8.1/UCB3CLK/TA2.0/C0.0
TA2_C0 (internal)
TA1
P5.6/TA2.1/VREF+/VeREF+/C1.7
TA2_C1 (internal)
ADC14 (internal)
ADC14SHSx = {5}
CCR2
TA2
P5.7/TA2.2/VREF-/VeREF-/C1.6
TA2_C2 (internal)
ADC14 (internal)
ADC14SHSx = {6}
CCR3
TA3
P6.6/TA2.3/UCB3SIMO/
UCB3SDA/C1.1
TA2_C3 (internal)
CCR4
TA4
P6.7/TA2.4/UCB3SOMI/
UCB3SCL/C1.0
TA2_C4 (internal)
CCR1
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
93
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 6-23. TA2 Signal Connections
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-24. TA3 Signal Connections
DEVICE INPUT PIN OR INTERNAL
SIGNAL
MODULE INPUT
SIGNAL
P8.3/TA3CLK/A22
TACLK
ACLK (internal)
ACLK
SMCLK (internal)
SMCLK
From Capacitive Touch I/O 1
(internal)
INCLK
P10.4/TA3.0/C0.7
CCI0A
DVSS
CCI0B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P10.5/TA3.1/C0.6
CCI1A
ACLK (internal)
CCI1B
DVSS
GND
PRODUCT PREVIEW
DVCC
VCC
P8.2/TA3.2/A23
CCI2A
C0OUT (internal)
CCI2B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P9.2/TA3.3
CCI3A
TA2_C3 (internal)
CCI3B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
P9.3/TA3.4
CCI4A
From Capacitive Touch I/O 1
(internal)
CCI4B
DVSS
GND
DVCC
VCC
6.8.4
MODULE
BLOCK
MODULE
OUTPUT SIGNAL
DEVICE OUTPUT PIN OR
INTERNAL SIGNAL
Timer
N/A
N/A
CCR0
TA0
P10.4/TA3.0/C0.7
TA3_C0 (internal)
CCR1
TA1
P10.5/TA3.1/C0.6
TA3_C1 (internal)
ADC14 (internal)
ADC14SHSx = {7}
CCR2
TA2
P8.2/TA3.2/A23
TA3_C2 (internal)
CCR3
TA3
P9.2/TA3.3
TA3_C3 (internal)
CCR4
TA4
P9.3/TA3.4
TA3_C4 (internal)
Timer32
Timer32 is an ARM dual 32-bit timer module. It contains two 32-bit timers, each of which can be
configured as two independent 16-bit timers. The two timers can generate independent events or a
combined event, which can be processed according to application requirements.
6.8.5
Enhanced Universal Serial Communication Interface (eUSCI)
The eUSCI modules are used for serial data communication. The eUSCI module supports synchronous
communication protocols such as SPI (3-pin or 4-pin) and I2C, and asynchronous communication
protocols such as UART, enhanced UART with automatic baudrate detection, and IrDA.
The eUSCI_An module provides support for SPI (3-pin or 4-pin), UART, enhanced UART, and IrDA.
The eUSCI_Bn module provides support for SPI (3-pin or 4-pin) and I2C.
The MSP432P401x devices offer up to four eUSCI_A and four eUSCI_B modules.
6.8.6
Real-Time Clock (RTC_C)
The RTC_C module contains an integrated real-time clock. It integrates an internal calendar which
compensates for months with less than 31 days and includes leap year correction. The RTC_C also
supports flexible alarm functions, offset-calibration and temperature compensation. The RTC_C operation
is available in LPM3 and LPM3.5 modes to minimize power consumption.
94
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
6.8.7
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Watchdog Timer (WDT_A)
The primary function of the WDT_A module is to perform a controlled system restart after a software
problem occurs. If the selected time interval expires, a system reset is generated. If the watchdog function
is not needed in an application, the module can be configured as an interval timer and can generate
interrupts at selected time intervals.
The watchdog can generate a reset either on a time-out or a password violation. This reset can be
configured to generate either a Hard Reset or a Soft Reset into the system. Refer to the MSP432P4xx
Family Technical Reference Manual for more details.
WDTSSELx
NORMAL OPERATION
(WATCHDOG AND INTERVAL TIMER MODE)
00
SMCLK
01
ACLK
10
VLOCLK
11
BCLK
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 6-25. WDT_A Clocks
CAUTION
The WDT must be set to interval mode before transitioning into the LPM3 or
LPM3.5 modes of operation. This allows the WDT event to wake the device
and return it to active modes of operation. Using the WDT in watchdog mode
may result in nondeterministic behavior due to the generated reset.
6.8.7.1
Watchdog Reset Control Register [Address = E004_3008h]
Figure 6-15. SYS_WDTRESET_CTL Register
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
15
14
13
12
11
10
r
r
r
r
r
r
24
23
Reserved
r
r
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
9
8
Reserved
7
6
5
4
3
2
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
1
0
VIOLA TIMEO
TION
UT
rw-1
rw-1
Table 6-26. SYS_WDTRESET_CTL Register Description
Bit
Field
Type
Reset
Description
31-2
Reserved
R
0h
Reserved. Reads return 0h
1
VIOLATION
RW
1h
0b = WDT password violation event generates Soft reset
1b = WDT password violation event generates Hard reset
0
TIMEOUT
RW
1h
0b = WDT time-out event generates Soft reset
1b = WDT time-out event generates Hard reset
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
95
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
CAUTION
The WDT should ideally be configured to generate a Hard Reset into the
system. A Soft Reset will reset the CPU, but leave the rest of the system and
peripherals unaffected. As a result if the WDT is configured to generate a Soft
Reset, the application should assume responsibility for the fact that a Soft
Reset can corrupt an ongoing transaction from the CPU into the system.
6.8.8
ADC14
The ADC14 module supports fast, 14-bit analog-to-digital conversions with differential and single-ended
inputs. The module implements a 14-bit SAR core, sample select control, reference generator and a
conversion result buffer. The window comparators with a lower and upper limit allow CPU independent
result monitoring through different window comparator interrupt flags.
The available ADC14 external trigger sources are summarized in Table 6-27.
The available multiplexing between internal and external analog inputs of ADC14 is listed in Table 628,Table 6-29,Table 6-30.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 6-27. ADC14 Trigger Signal Connections
ADC14SHSx
BINARY
DECIMAL
CONNECTED TRIGGER
SOURCE
000
0
Software (ADC14SC)
001
1
TA0_C1
010
2
TA0_C2
011
3
TA1_C1
100
4
TA1_C2
101
5
TA2_C1
110
6
TA2_C2
111
7
TA3_C1
Table 6-28. ADC14 Channel Mapping on 100PZ Devices
(1)
(2)
96
ADC14 CHANNEL
EXTERNAL
CHANNEL SOURCE
(CONTROL BIT = 0)
INTERNAL CHANNEL
SOURCE
(CONTROL BIT = 1) (1)
CONTROL BIT (2)
Channel 23
Channel 22
A23
Battery Monitor
ADC14BATMAP
A22
Temperature Sensor
ADC14TCMAP
Channel 21
A21
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH0MAP
Channel 20
A20
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH1MAP
Channel 19
A19
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH2MAP
Channel 18
A18
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH3MAP
If an internal source is marked as NA or Reserved, it indicates that only the external source is
available for that channel.
Refer to theADC14 chapter in the MSP432P4xx Family Technical Reference Manual for details on the
registers that contain the control bits listed in the table.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 6-29. ADC14 Channel Mapping on 80ZXH Devices
ADC14 CHANNEL
EXTERNAL
CHANNEL SOURCE
(CONTROL BIT = 0)
INTERNAL CHANNEL
SOURCE
(CONTROL BIT = 1) (1)
CONTROL BIT (2)
Channel 15
A15
Battery Monitor
ADC14BATMAP
Channel 14
A14
Temperature Sensor
ADC14TCMAP
Channel 13
A13
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH0MAP
Channel 12
A12
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH1MAP
Channel 11
A11
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH2MAP
Channel 10
A10
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH3MAP
(1)
If an internal source is marked as NA or Reserved, it indicates that only the external source is
available for that channel.
Refer to the ADC14 chapter in the MSP432P4xx Family Technical Reference Manual for details on the
registers that contain the control bits listed in the table.
(2)
ADC14 CHANNEL
EXTERNAL
CHANNEL SOURCE
(CONTROL BIT = 0)
Channel 11
Channel 10
(1)
(2)
6.8.9
INTERNAL CHANNEL
SOURCE
(CONTROL BIT = 1) (1)
CONTROL BIT (2)
A11
Battery Monitor
ADC14BATMAP
A10
Temperature Sensor
ADC14TCMAP
Channel 9
A9
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH0MAP
Channel 8
A8
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH1MAP
Channel 7
A7
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH2MAP
Channel 6
A6
NA (Reserved)
ADC14CH3MAP
If an internal source is marked as NA or Reserved, it indicates that only the external source is
available for that channel.
Refer to the ADC14 chapter in the MSP432P4xx Family Technical Reference Manual for details on the
registers that contain the control bits listed in the table.
Comparator_E (COMP_E)
The primary function of the COMP_E module is to support precision slope analog-to-digital conversions,
battery voltage supervision, and monitoring of external analog signals.
There are two COMP_E modules available on the MSP432P401x devices.
6.8.10 Shared Reference (REF_A)
The REF_A is responsible for generation of all critical reference voltages that can be used by the various
analog peripherals in the device. The reference voltage from REF_A can also be switched on to device pin
for external use.
6.8.11 CRC32
The CRC32 module produces a signature based on a sequence of entered data values and can be used
for data checking purposes. It supports both a CRC32 and a CRC16 computation.
• The CRC16 computation signature is based on the CRC16-CCITT standard.
• The CRC32 computation signature is based on the CRC32-ISO3309 standard.
6.8.12 AES256 Accelerator
The AES accelerator module performs encryption and decryption of 128-bit data with 128-bit, 192-bit, or
256-bit keys according to the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) (FIPS PUB 197) in hardware.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
97
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Table 6-30. ADC14 Channel Mapping on 64RGC Devices
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.8.13 True Random Seed
The Device Descriptor Information (TLV) section contains a 128-bit true random seed that can be used to
implement a deterministic random number generator.
6.9
Code Development and Debug
The MSP432P401x devices support various methods through which the user can carry out code
development and debug on the device.
6.9.1
JTAG and Serial Wire Debug (SWD) Based Development, Debug and Trace
The device supports both 4-pin JTAG and the 2-pin SWD modes of operation. The device is compatible
with all standard Cortex-M4 debuggers available in the market today. The debug logic in the device has
been designed to remain minimally intrusive to the application state. In low-power modes, the user can
enable the debugger to override the state of the PSS, thereby gaining access to debug and trace features.
In 2-pin SWD mode, the TDO pin can be used to export serial wire trace output (SWO) data. In addition,
the TDI and TDO pins of the device can be reassigned as user I/Os. Refer to sections Section 6.10.22
and Section 6.10.23 for more details.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
NOTE
If the device has activated debug security, debugger accesses into the device is completely
disabled. The debugger, however, is still be able to scan the run/halt state of the CPU.
Further control of and visibility into the device is possible only after initiating a mass erase of
the device flash contents.
6.9.2
Peripheral Halt Control Register [Address = E004_300Ch]
This register allows the user independent control over the functionality of device peripherals during code
development and debug. When the CPU is halted, the bits in this register can control whether the
corresponding peripheral freezes its operation (such as incrementing, transmit, and receive) or continues
its operation (debug remains nonintrusive). The registers of the peripheral remain accessible irrespective
of the values in the Halt Control Register
Figure 6-16. SYS_PERIHALT_CTL Register
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
Reserved
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
15
DMA
14
WDTA
12
eUB3
11
eUB2
10
eUB1
9
eUB0
8
eUA3
rw-0
rw-1
13
ADC1
4
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
7
eUA2
6
eUA1
5
eUA0
4
T32
3
TA3
2
TA2
1
TA1
0
TA0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
rw-0
Table 6-31. SYS_PERIHALT_CTL Register Description
BIT
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
DESCRIPTION
31-16
Reserved
R
0h
Reserved. Reads return 0h
15
DMA
RW
0h
14
WDTA
RW
1h
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
13
ADC14
RW
0h
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
98
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 6-31. SYS_PERIHALT_CTL Register Description (continued)
BIT
FIELD
TYPE
RESET
12
eUB3
RW
0h
11
eUB2
RW
0h
DESCRIPTION
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
10
eUB1
RW
0h
9
eUB0
RW
0h
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
8
eUA3
RW
0h
7
eUA2
RW
0h
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
6
eUA1
RW
0h
5
eUA0
RW
0h
4
T32
RW
0h
3
TA3
RW
0h
2
TA2
RW
0h
1
TA1
RW
0h
0
TA0
RW
0h
PRODUCT PREVIEW
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
0b = IP operation unaffected when CPU is halted
1b = freezes IP operation when CPU is halted
6.9.3
Bootstrap Loader (BSL)
After any POR class reset, the MSP432P401x devices automatically check for presence of user code in
the flash. If the user code is not present, the BSL routine is invoked.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
99
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10 Input/Output Schematics
6.10.1 Port P1, P1.0 to P1.7, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
PyREN.x
PyDIR.x
From module
00
01
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
10
11
PyOUT.x
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
00
From module
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
Py.x/USCI
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PySEL1.x
PySEL0.x
PyIN.x
EN
To module
D
Functional representation only.
Figure 6-17. Py.x/USCI Pin Schematic
100
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 6-32. Port P1 (P1.0 to P1.7) Pin Functions
P1.0/UCA0STE
P1.1/UCA0CLK
P1.2/UCA0RXD/UCA0SOMI
x
0
1
2
FUNCTION
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P1DIR.x
P1SEL1.x
P1SEL0.x
P1.0 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
UCA0STE
X (2)
0
1
1
0
1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P1.1 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
UCA0CLK
X (2)
0
1
1
0
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (2)
0
1
1
0
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (2)
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P1.2 (I/O)
UCA0RXD/UCA0SOMI
P1.3/UCA0TXD/UCA0SIMO
3
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P1.3 (I/O)
UCA0TXD/UCA0SIMO
P1.4/UCB0STE
4
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P1.4 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
UCB0STE
P1.5/UCB0CLK
P1.6/UCB0SIMO/UCB0SDA
5
6
X
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P1.5 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
UCB0CLK
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P1.6 (I/O)
UCB0SIMO/UCB0SDA
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PIN NAME (P1.x)
X = Don't care
Direction controlled by eUSCI_A0 module.
Direction controlled by eUSCI_B0 module.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
101
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-32. Port P1 (P1.0 to P1.7) Pin Functions (continued)
PIN NAME (P1.x)
P1.7/UCB0SOMI/UCB0SCL
x
7
FUNCTION
P1.7 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P1DIR.x
P1SEL1.x
P1SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
UCB0SOMI/UCB0SCL
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
102
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.2 Port P2, P2.0 to P2.3, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-17
Table 6-33. Port P2 (P2.0 to P2.3) Pin Functions
P2.0/PM_UCA1STE
x
0
FUNCTION
P2.0 (I/O)
UCA1STE
P2.1/PM_UCA1CLK
P2.2/PM_UCA1RXD/PM_U
CA1SOMI
P2.3/PM_UCA1TXD/PM_U
CA1SIMO
(1)
(2)
1
2
P2DIR.x
P2SEL1.x
P2SEL0.x
P2MAPx
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
X
(2)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P2.1 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
UCA1CLK
X (2)
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
X (2)
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
X (2)
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P2.2 (I/O)
UCA1RXD/UCA1SOMI
3
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P2.3 (I/O)
UCA1TXD/UCA1SIMO
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PIN NAME (P2.x)
X = Don't care
Direction controlled by eUSCI_A1 module.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
103
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10.3 Port P3, P3.0 to P3.7, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-17
Table 6-34. Port P3 (P3.0 to P3.7) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P3.x)
P3.0/PM_UCA2STE
x
0
FUNCTION
P3.0 (I/O)
UCA2STE
P3.1/PM_UCA2CLK
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P3.2/PM_UCA2RXD/PM_U
CA2SOMI
P3.3/PM_UCA2TXD/PM_U
CA2SIMO
P3.4/PM_UCB2STE
P3.5/PM_UCB2CLK
1
2
5
104
P3SEL0.x
P3MAPx
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
X
(2)
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P3.1 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
UCA2CLK
X (2)
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
X (2)
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
X (2)
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P3.2 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P3.3 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P3.4 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
UCB2STE
X (3)
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P3.5 (I/O)
UCB2CLK
(1)
(2)
(3)
P3SEL1.x
0
UCA2TXD/UCA2SIMO
4
P3DIR.x
I: 0; O: 1
N/A
UCA2RXD/UCA2SOMI
3
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
I: 0; O: 1
X
(3)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
X = Don't care
Direction controlled by eUSCI_A2 module.
Direction controlled by eUSCI_B2 module.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 6-34. Port P3 (P3.0 to P3.7) Pin Functions (continued)
PIN NAME (P3.x)
x
P3.6/PM_UCB2SIMO/PM_
UCB2SDA
6
P3.6 (I/O)
UCB2SIMO/UCB2SDA
7
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P3DIR.x
P3SEL1.x
P3SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
X (3)
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
X (3)
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P3.7 (I/O)
UCB2SOMI/UCB2SCL
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P3MAPx
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P3.7/PM_UCB2SOMI/PM_
UCB2SCL
FUNCTION
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
105
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10.4 Port P9, P9.4 to P9.7, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-17
Table 6-35. Port P9 (P9.4 to P9.7) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P9.x)
P9.4/UCA3STE (2)
x
4
FUNCTION
P9.4 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P9DIR.x
P9SEL1.x
P9SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
UCA3STE
P9.5/UCA3CLK (2)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P9.6/UCA3RXD/UCA3SOMI (2)
5
6
X
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P9.5 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
UCA3CLK
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P9.6 (I/O)
UCA3RXD/UCA3SOMI
P9.7/UCA3TXD/UCA3SIMO (2)
7
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P9.7 (I/O)
UCA3TXD/UCA3SIMO
(1)
(2)
(3)
106
(3)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
X = Don't care
Not available on 80ZXH and 64RGC packages.
Direction controlled by eUSCI_A3 module.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.5 Port P10, P10.0 to P10.3, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-17
Table 6-36. Port P10 (P10.0 to P10.3) Pin Functions
P10.0/UCB3STE (2)
x
0
FUNCTION
P10.0 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P10DIR.x
P10SEL1.x
P10SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
UCB3STE
P10.1/UCB3CLK (2)
P10.2/UCB3SIMO/UCB3SDA (2)
1
2
X
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P10.1 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
UCB3CLK
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P10.2 (I/O)
UCB3SIMO/UCB3SDA
P10.3/UCB3SOMI/UCB3SCL (2)
3
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P10.3 (I/O)
UCB3SOMI/UCB3SCL
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PIN NAME (P10.x)
X = Don't care
Not available on 80ZXH and 64RGC packages.
Direction controlled by eUSCI_B3 module.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
107
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10.6 Port P2, P2.4 to P2.7, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
PyREN.x
PyDIR.x
00
01
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
10
11
PyOUT.x
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
00
From module
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
Py.x/Mod1/Mod2
PySEL1.x
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PySEL0.x
PyIN.x
EN
To module
D
Functional representation only.
Figure 6-18. Py.x/Mod1/Mod2 Pin Schematic
108
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 6-37. Port P2 (P2.4 to P2.7) Pin Functions
P2.4/PM_TA0.1 (2)
P2.5/PM_TA0.2 (2)
P2.6/PM_TA0.3 (2)
P2.7/PM_TA0.4 (2)
(1)
(2)
x
4
5
6
7
FUNCTION
P2.4 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P2DIR.x
P2SEL1.x
P2SEL0.x
P2MAPx
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
TA0.CCI1A
0
TA0.1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P2.5 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
TA0.CCI2A
0
TA0.2
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P2.6 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
TA0.CCI3A
0
TA0.3
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P2.7 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
TA0.CCI4A
0
TA0.4
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PIN NAME (P2.x)
X = Don't care
Not available on the 64-pin RGC package.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
109
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10.7 Port P7, P7.0 to P7.3, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-18
Table 6-38. Port P7 (P7.0 to P7.3) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P7.x)
P7.0/PM_SMCLK/
PM_DMAE0
P7.1/PM_C0OUT/
PM_TA0CLK
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P7.2/PM_C1OUT/
PM_TA1CLK
P7.3/PM_TA0.0
(1)
110
x
0
1
2
3
FUNCTION
P7.0 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P7DIR.x
P7SEL1.x
P7SEL0.x
P7MAPx
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
DMAE0
0
SMCLK
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P7.1 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
TA0CLK
0
C0OUT
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P7.2 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
TA1CLK
0
C1OUT
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P7.3 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
TA0.CCI0A
0
TA0.0
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
X = Don't care
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.8 Port P9, P9.2 and P9.3, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-18
Table 6-39. Port P9 (P9.2 and P9.3) Pin Functions
P9.2/TA3.3 (1)
P9.3/TA3.4 (1)
(1)
x
2
3
FUNCTION
P9.2 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS
P9DIR.x
P9SEL1.x
P9SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
TA3.CCI3A
0
TA3.3
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
P9.3 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
TA3.CCI4A
0
TA3.4
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PIN NAME (P9.x)
Not available on 80ZXH and 64RGC packages.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
111
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10.9 Port P4, P4.0 to P4.7, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
To ADC
From ADC
PyREN.x
PyDIR.x
00
01
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PyOUT.x
0
DVCC
1
1
00
PRODUCT PREVIEW
†
01
From module 2
†
10
DVSS
11
From module 1
DVSS
Py.x/Mod1/Mod2/Az
PySEL1.x
PySEL0.x
PyIN.x
EN
To modules
†
Bus
Keeper
D
Output will be DVSS if module 1 or module 2 function is not available. Refer to pin function tables.
Functional representation only.
Figure 6-19. Py.x/Mod1/Mod2/Az Pin Schematic
112
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 6-40. Port P4 (P4.0 to P4.7) Pin Functions
P4.0/A13 (2)
x
0
FUNCTION
P4.0 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P4DIR.x
P4SEL1.x
P4SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A13 (3)
P4.1/A12
(2)
P4.2/ACLK/TA2CLK/A11
P4.3/MCLK/RTCCLK/A10
1
2
3
P4.1 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A12 (3)
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
P4.2 (I/O)
N/A
0
ACLK
1
TA2CLK
0
DVSS
1
A11 (3)
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
P4.3 (I/O)
N/A
0
MCLK
1
N/A
0
RTCCLK
1
A10 (3)
P4.4/HSMCLK/SVMHOUT/
A9
4
P4.4 (I/O)
N/A
0
HSMCLK
1
N/A
0
SVMHOUT
1
A9 (3)
P4.5/A8
5
P4.5 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A8 (3)
P4.6/A7
(1)
(2)
(3)
6
P4.6 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A7 (3)
X
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PIN NAME (P4.x)
X = Don't care
Not available on the 64-pin RGC package.
Setting P4SEL1.x and P4SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
113
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-40. Port P4 (P4.0 to P4.7) Pin Functions (continued)
PIN NAME (P4.x)
P4.7/A6
x
7
FUNCTION
P4.7 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P4DIR.x
P4SEL1.x
P4SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A6 (3)
X
PRODUCT PREVIEW
114
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.10 Port P5, P5.0 to P5.5, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-19
Table 6-41. Port P5 (P5.0 to P5.5) Pin Functions
P5.0/A5
x
0
FUNCTION
P5.0 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P5DIR.x
P5SEL1.x
P5SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A5 (2)
P5.1/A4
1
P5.1 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A4 (2)
P5.2/A3
P5.3/A2
P5.4/A1
2
3
4
P5.2 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A3 (2)
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
P5.3 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A2 (2)
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
P5.4 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A1 (2)
P5.5/A0
(1)
(2)
5
P5.5 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A0 (2)
X
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PIN NAME (P5.x)
X = Don't care
Setting P5SEL1.x and P5SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
115
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10.11 Port P6, P6.0 and P6.1, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-19
Table 6-42. Port P6 (P6.0 and P6.1) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P6.x)
P6.0/A15 (2)
x
0
FUNCTION
P6.0 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P6DIR.x
P6SEL1.x
P6SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A15 (3)
P6.1/A14
PRODUCT PREVIEW
(1)
(2)
(3)
116
(2)
1
P6.1 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A14 (3)
X
X = Don't care
Not available on the 64-pin RGC package.
Setting P6SEL1.x and P6SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.12 Port P8, P8.2 to P8.7, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-19
Table 6-43. Port P8 (P8.2 to P8.7) Pin Functions
P8.2/TA3.2/A23 (2)
x
2
FUNCTION
P8.2 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P8DIR.x
P8SEL1.x
P8SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
TA3.CCI2A
0
TA3.2
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A23 (3)
P8.3/TA3CLK/A22
(2)
3
X
1
1
P8.3 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
TA3CLK
0
DVSS
1
0
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
A22 (3)
P8.4/A21
P8.5/A20
P8.6/A19
(2)
(2)
(2)
4
5
6
P8.4 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A21 (3)
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
P8.5 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A20 (3)
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
P8.6 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A19 (3)
P8.7/A18 (2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
7
P8.7 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A18 (3)
X
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PIN NAME (P8.x)
X = Don't care
Not available on 80ZXH and 64RGC packages.
Setting P8SEL1.x and P8SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
117
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10.13 Port P9, P9.0 and P9.1, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pin Schematic: see Figure 6-19
Table 6-44. Port P9 (P9.0 and P9.1) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P9.x)
P9.0/A17 (2)
x
0
FUNCTION
P9.0 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P9DIR.x
P9SEL1.x
P9SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A17 (3)
P9.1/A16
PRODUCT PREVIEW
(1)
(2)
(3)
118
(2)
1
P9.1 (I/O)
N/A
0
DVSS
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
A16 (3)
X
X = Don't care
Not available on 80ZXH and 64RGC packages.
Setting P9SEL1.x and P9SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.14 Port P5, P5.6 and P5.7, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
ADC Reference
To Comparator
From Comparator
CPD.q
PyREN.x
00
01
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PyOUT.x
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
00
From module
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
Py.x/Mod/VREF/VeREF/Cp.q
PySEL1.x
PySEL0.x
PyIN.x
Bus
Keeper
EN
To module
D
Functional representation only.
Figure 6-20. Py.x/Mod/VREF/VeREF/Cp.q Pin Schematic
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
119
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PyDIR.x
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-45. Port P5 (P5.6 and P5.7) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P5.x)
x
P5.6/TA2.1/VREF+/VeREF+/
C1.7
6
FUNCTION
P5.6 (I/O)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P5DIR.x
P5SEL1.x
P5SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
1
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
TA2.CCI1A
0
TA2.1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
VREF+, VeREF+, C1.7 (2) (3)
P5.7/TA2.2/VREF-/VeREF/C1.6
(1)
(2)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
(3)
120
7
P5.7 (I/O)
TA2.CCI2A
0
TA2.2
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
VREF-, VeREF-, C1.6 (2) (3)
X
X = Don't care
Setting P5SEL1.x and P5SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Setting the CEPD.q bit of the comparator disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents
when applying analog signals. Selecting the C1.q input pin to the comparator multiplexer with the CEIPSEL or CEIMSEL bits
automatically disables the output driver and input buffer for that pin, regardless of the state of the associated CEPD.q bit.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.15 Port P6, P6.2 to P6.5, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
To Comparator
From Comparator
CPD.q
PyREN.x
From module
00
01
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PyOUT.x
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
00
From module
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
Py.x/USCI/Cp.q
PySEL1.x
PySEL0.x
PyIN.x
Bus
Keeper
EN
To module
D
Functional representation only.
Figure 6-21. Py.x/USCI/Cp.q Pin Schematic
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
121
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PyDIR.x
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-46. Port P6 (P6.2 to P6.5) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P6.x)
P6.2/UCB1STE/C1.5 (2)
P6.3/UCB1CLK/C1.4
(2)
P6.4/UCB1SIMO/UCB1SDA/C1
.3 (2)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P6.5/UCB1SOMI/UCB1SCL/C1.
2 (2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
122
x
2
3
4
FUNCTION
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P6DIR.x
P6SEL1.x
P6SEL0.x
P6.2 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
UCB1STE
X (3)
0
1
1
0
N/A
0
DVSS
1
C1.5 (4) (5)
X
1
1
P6.3 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
UCB1CLK
X (3)
0
1
1
0
N/A
0
DVSS
1
C1.4 (4) (5)
X
1
1
P6.4 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (3)
0
1
1
0
UCB1SIMO/UCB1SDA
5
N/A
0
DVSS
1
C1.3 (4) (5)
X
1
1
P6.5 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X (3)
0
1
1
0
1
1
UCB1SOMI/UCB1SCL
N/A
0
DVSS
1
C1.2 (4) (5)
X
X = Don't care
Not available on the 64-pin RGC package.
Direction controlled by eUSCI_B1 module.
Setting P6SEL1.x and P6SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Setting the CEPD.q bit of the comparator disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents
when applying analog signals. Selecting the C1.q input pin to the comparator multiplexer with the CEIPSEL or CEIMSEL bits
automatically disables the output driver and input buffer for that pin, regardless of the state of the associated CEPD.q bit.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.16 Port P6, P6.6 and P6.7, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
To Comparator
From Comparator
CPD.q
PyREN.x
00
01
From USCI
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PyOUT.x
00
From module
01
From USCI
10
DVSS
11
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
Py.x/Mod/USCI/Cp.q
PySEL1.x
PySEL0.x
PyIN.x
Bus
Keeper
EN
To modules
D
Functional representation only.
Figure 6-22. Py.x/Mod/USCI/Cp.q Pin Schematic
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
123
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PyDIR.x
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-47. Port P6 (P6.6 and P6.7) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P6.x)
x
P6.6/TA2.3/UCB3SIMO/UCB
3SDA/C1.1
6
FUNCTION
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P6DIR.x
P6SEL1.x
P6SEL0.x
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
X (2)
1
0
C1.1 (3) (4)
X
1
1
P6.7 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
0
1
X (2)
1
0
X
1
1
P6.6 (I/O)
TA2.CCI3A
0
TA2.3
1
UCB3SIMO/UCB3SDA
P6.7/TA2.4/UCB3SOMI/UCB
3SCL/C1.0
7
TA2.CCI4A
0
TA2.4
1
UCB3SOMI/UCB3SCL
C1.0
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
124
(3) (4)
X = Don't care
Direction controlled by eUSCI_B3 module.
Setting P6SEL1.x and P6SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Setting the CEPD.q bit of the comparator disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents
when applying analog signals. Selecting the C1.q input pin to the comparator multiplexer with the CEIPSEL or CEIMSEL bits
automatically disables the output driver and input buffer for that pin, regardless of the state of the associated CEPD.q bit.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.17 Port P8, P8.0 and P8.1, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
To Comparator
From Comparator
CPD.q
PyREN.x
00
01
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PyOUT.x
00
From USCI
01
From module
10
DVSS
11
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
Py.x/USCI/Mod/Cp.q
PySEL1.x
PySEL0.x
PyIN.x
Bus
Keeper
EN
To modules
D
Functional representation only.
Figure 6-23. Py.x/USCI/Mod/Cp.q Pin Schematic
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
125
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PyDIR.x
From USCI
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-48. Port P8 (P8.0 and P8.1) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P8.x)
P8.0/UCB3STE/TA1.0/C0.1
P8.1/UCB3CLK/TA2.0/C0.0
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
126
x
0
1
FUNCTION
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P8DIR.x
P8SEL1.x
P8SEL0.x
P8.0 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
UCB3STE
X (2)
0
1
TA1.CCI0A
0
TA1.0
1
1
0
C0.1 (3) (4)
X
1
1
P8.1 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
UCB3CLK
X (2)
0
1
TA2.CCI0A
0
TA2.0
1
1
0
C0.0 (3) (4)
X
1
1
X = Don't care
Direction controlled by eUSCI_B3 module.
Setting P8SEL1.x and P8SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Setting the CEPD.q bit of the comparator disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents
when applying analog signals. Selecting the C0.q input pin to the comparator multiplexer with the CEIPSEL or CEIMSEL bits
automatically disables the output driver and input buffer for that pin, regardless of the state of the associated CEPD.q bit.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.18 Port P10, P10.4 and P10.5, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
To Comparator
From Comparator
CPD.q
PyREN.x
00
01
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PyOUT.x
00
From module
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
Py.x/Mod/Cp.q
PySEL1.x
PySEL0.x
PyIN.x
Bus
Keeper
EN
To module
D
Functional representation only.
Figure 6-24. Py.x/Mod/Cp.q Pin Schematic
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
127
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PyDIR.x
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-49. Port P10 (P10.4 and P10.5) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P10.x)
P10.4/TA3.0/C0.7 (2)
x
4
FUNCTION
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P10DIR.x
P10SEL1.x
P10SEL0.x
P10.4 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
TA3.CCI0A
0
TA3.0
1
0
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
1
0
C0.7 (3) (4)
P10.5/TA3.1/C0.6
(1)
(2)
(3)
PRODUCT PREVIEW
(4)
128
(2)
5
X
1
1
P10.5 (I/O)
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
TA3.CCI1A
0
TA3.1
1
0
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
1
0
C0.6 (3) (4)
X
1
1
X = Don't care
Not available on 80ZXH and 64RGC packages.
Setting P10SEL1.x and P10SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Setting the CEPD.q bit of the comparator disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents
when applying analog signals. Selecting the C0.q input pin to the comparator multiplexer with the CEIPSEL or CEIMSEL bits
automatically disables the output driver and input buffer for that pin, regardless of the state of the associated CEPD.q bit.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.19 Port P7, P7.4 to P7.7, Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
To Comparator
From Comparator
CPD.q
PyMAP.x = PMAP_ANALOG
PyREN.x
PyDIR.x
00
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
01
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
10
11
00
From module
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
Py.x/Mod/Cp.q
PySEL1.x
PySEL0.x
PyIN.x
Bus
Keeper
EN
To module
D
Functional representation only.
Figure 6-25. Py.x/Mod/Cp.q Pin Schematic
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
129
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PyOUT.x
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-50. Port P7 (P7.4 to P7.7) Pin Functions
PIN NAME (P7.x)
P7.4/PM_TA1.4/C0.5 (2)
x
4
FUNCTION
P7.4 (I/O)
P7.5/PM_TA1.3/C0.4
P7.6/PM_TA1.2/C0.3
PRODUCT PREVIEW
P7.7/PM_TA1.1/C0.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
130
(2)
(2)
5
6
7
P7DIR.x
P7SEL1.x
P7SEL0.x
P7MAPx
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
X
1
1
X
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
TA1.CCI4A
0
TA1.4
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
C0.5 (3) (4) (5)
(2)
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
P7.5 (I/O)
TA1.CCI3A
0
TA1.3
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
C0.4 (3) (4) (5)
X
1
1
X
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
P7.6 (I/O)
TA1.CCI2A
0
TA1.2
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
C0.3 (3) (4) (5)
X
1
1
X
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
0
1
default
1
0
X
1
1
X
P7.7 (I/O)
TA1.CCI1A
0
TA1.1
1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
C0.2 (3) (4) (5)
X
X = Don't care
Not available on the 64-pin RGC package.
Setting P7SEL1.x and P7SEL0.x disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents when
applying analog signals.
Setting the CEPD.q bit of the comparator disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger to prevent parasitic cross currents
when applying analog signals. Selecting the C0.q input pin to the comparator multiplexer with the CEIPSEL or CEIMSEL bits
automatically disables the output driver and input buffer for that pin, regardless of the state of the associated CEPD.q bit.
Setting P7MAPx = PM_ANALOG disables the output driver and the input Schmitt trigger independent of P7SEL1.x and P7SEL0.x
settings.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.20 Port PJ, PJ.0 and PJ.1 Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
To LFXT XIN
PJREN.0
00
01
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PJOUT.0
00
DVSS
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
PJ.0/LFXIN
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PJDIR.0
PJSEL0.0
PJSEL1.0
PJIN.0
Bus
Keeper
EN
To modules
D
Functional representation only.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
131
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Pad Logic
To LFXT XOUT
PJSEL0.0
PJSEL1.0
LFXTBYPASS
PJREN.1
PJDIR.1
00
01
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PJOUT.1
00
DVSS
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
PJ.1/LFXOUT
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PJSEL0.1
PJSEL1.1
PJIN.1
EN
To modules
Bus
Keeper
D
Functional representation only.
132
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Table 6-51. Port PJ (PJ.0 and PJ.1) Pin Functions
PJ.0/LFXIN
x
0
FUNCTION
PJ.0 (I/O)
PJSEL1.0
PJSEL0.0
LFXT
BYPASS
I: 0; O: 1
X
X
0
0
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
0
1
0
X
X
X
0
1
1
0
0
1
X
X
X
1
(2)
(2)
1
I: 0; O: 1
N/A
0
DVSS
1
LFXOUT crystal mode
(3)
(4)
PJSEL0.1
0
PJ.1 (I/O)
(1)
(2)
PJSEL1.1
DVSS
LFXIN bypass mode
PJ.1/LFXOUT
PJDIR.x
N/A
LFXIN crystal mode
(2)
(1)
X
0
see (4)
see (4)
X
0
see (4)
see (4)
X
0
0
1
X
X
X
0
1 (3)
0
1 (3)
0
0
1
X
X
X
1 (3)
0
1
0
0
X = Don't care
Setting PJSEL1.0 = 0 and PJSEL0.0 = 1 causes the general-purpose I/O to be disabled. When LFXTBYPASS = 0, PJ.0 and PJ.1 are
configured for crystal operation and PJSEL1.1 and PJSEL0.1 are do not care. When LFXTBYPASS = 1, PJ.0 is configured for bypass
operation and PJ.1 is configured as general-purpose I/O.
When PJ.0 is configured in bypass mode, PJ.1 is configured as general-purpose I/O.
With PJSEL0.1 = 1 or PJSEL1.1 =1 the general-purpose I/O functionality is disabled. No input function is available. When configured as
output, the pin is actively pulled to zero.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
133
PRODUCT PREVIEW
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS
PIN NAME (PJ.x)
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10.21 Port PJ, PJ.2 and PJ.3 Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Pad Logic
To HFXT XIN
PJREN.3
PJDIR.3
00
01
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PJOUT.3
00
DVSS
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
PJ.3/HFXIN
PJSEL0.3
PJSEL1.3
PJIN.3
EN
To modules
Bus
Keeper
D
Functional representation only.
134
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Pad Logic
To HFXT XOUT
PJSEL0.3
PJSEL1.3
HFXTBYPASS
PJREN.2
PJDIR.2
00
01
10
Direction
0: Input
1: Output
11
PJOUT.2
00
DVSS
01
DVSS
10
DVSS
11
DVSS
0
DVCC
1
1
PJ.2/HFXOUT
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PJSEL0.2
PJSEL1.2
PJIN.2
Bus
Keeper
EN
To modules
D
Functional representation only.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
135
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-52. Port PJ (PJ.2 and PJ.3) Pin Functions
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS
PIN NAME (PJ.x)
PJ.3/HFXIN
x
3
FUNCTION
PJ.3 (I/O)
(2)
(2)
PJSEL0.3
HFXT
BYPASS
I: 0; O: 1
X
X
0
0
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
0
1
0
X
X
X
0
1
1
0
0
1
X
X
X
2
I: 0; O: 1
0
DVSS
1
PRODUCT PREVIEW
HFXOUT crystal mode
136
PJSEL1.3
1
N/A
(3)
(4)
PJSEL0.2
0
PJ.2 (I/O)
(1)
(2)
PJSEL1.2
DVSS
HFXIN bypass mode
PJ.2/HFXOUT
PJDIR.x
N/A
HFXIN crystal mode
(2)
(1)
X
0
see (4)
see (4)
X
0
see (4)
see (4)
X
0
0
1
X
X
X
0
1 (3)
0
1 (3)
0
0
1
X
X
X
1 (3)
0
1
0
0
X = Don't care
Setting PJSEL1.3 = 0 and PJSEL0.3 = 1 causes the general-purpose I/O to be disabled. When HFXTBYPASS = 0, PJ.2 and PJ.3 are
configured for crystal operation and PJSEL1.2 and PJSEL0.2 are do not care. When HFXTBYPASS = 1, PJ.3 is configured for bypass
operation and PJ.2 is configured as general-purpose I/O.
When PJ.3 is configured in bypass mode, PJ.2 is configured as general-purpose I/O.
With PJSEL0.2 = 1 or PJSEL1.2 =1 the general-purpose I/O functionality is disabled. No input function is available. When configured as
output, the pin is actively pulled to zero.
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.10.22 Port PJ, PJ.4 and PJ.5 Input/Output With Schmitt Trigger
Table 6-53. Port PJ (PJ.4 to PJ.5) Pin Functions
x
PJ.4/TDI/ADC14CLK
(2)
,
4
FUNCTION
PJ.4 (I/O)
TDI
(5)
(4)
,
5
PJSEL0.x
PJMAPx
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
X
(3)
JTAG (4 wire)
ADC12CLK
1
1
0
X
X
DVcc
X
1
1
X
X
I: 0; O: 1
0
0
X
X
X
0
1
X
1
X
PJ.5 (I/O)
Hi-Z
default
SWJ MODE OF
OPERATION (1)
1
SWO
(5)
PJSEL1.x
0
TDO
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
PJDIR.x
X
DVcc
PJ.5/TDO/SWO
CONTROL BITS OR SIGNALS (1)
default
X
SWD (2 wire)
(3)
JTAG (4 wire)
SWD (2 wire)
X
X indicates that the value of the control signal or mode of operation has no effect on the functionality.
This pin is internally pulled up if PJSEL0 is 1.
The 'default' value in the table indicates the functionality that is selected whenever a Hard Reset (or higher class reset) occurs.
This pin is has NO internal pull feature. If used in User IO mode or left unused, it must be pulled to GND through an external pulldown
resistor.
After any Hard Reset (or higher class reset), this pin returns to TDO functionality with the SWJ in JTAG (4 wire) mode of operation. If
used as a User IO, it reflects the value of the external pullup until the PJSELx bits are reconfigured to the value 00.
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
137
PRODUCT PREVIEW
PIN NAME (P7.x)
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
6.10.23 Ports SWCLKTCK and SWDIOTMS With Schmitt Trigger
Table 6-54. Ports SWCLKTCK and SWDIOTMS Pin Functions
PIN NAME
SWCLKTCK
SWDIOTMS
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
FUNCTION
SWJ MODE OF OPERATION
TCK (input)
JTAG (4 wire)
SWCLK (input)
SWD (2 wire)
TMS (input)
JTAG (4 wire)
SWDIO (I/O)
SWD (2 wire)
This pin is internally pulled to DVSS.
This pin is internall pulled to DVCC.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
138
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
6.11 Device Descriptors (TLV)
Table 6-56 lists the contents of the device descriptor tag-length-value (TLV) structure for MSP432P401xx
devices. Table 6-55 summarizes the Device IDs of the corresponding MSP432P401xx devices.
Table 6-55. Device IDs
DEVICE
DEVICE ID
MSP432P401RIPZ
0000A000h
MSP432P401MIPZ
0000A001h
MSP432P401RIZXH
0000A002h
MSP432P401MIZXH
0000A003h
MSP432P401RIRGC
0000A004h
MSP432P401MIRGC
0000A005h
Table 6-56. Device Descriptor Table (1)
Info Block
Die Record
Clock System
Calibration
(1)
ADDRESS
VALUE
00201000h
per unit
Device Info Tag
00201004h
0000000Bh
Device Info Length
00201008h
00000004h
Device ID
0020100Ch
See Table 6-55
HW Revision
00201010h
00000042h
Boot-code Revision
00201014h
00410042h
ROM Driver Library Revision
00201018h
01010022h
Die Record Tag
0020101Ch
0000000Ch
Die Record Length
00201020h
00000008h
Die X Position
00201024h
per unit
Die Y Position
00201028h
per unit
Wafer ID
0020102Ch
per unit
Lot ID
00201030h
per unit
Reserved
00201034h
per unit
Reserved
00201038h
per unit
Reserved
0020103Ch
per unit
Test Results
00201040h
FFFFFFFFh
Clock System Calibration Tag
00201044h
00000003h
Clock System Calibration Length
00201048h
00000010h
DCO IR mode: Frequency calibration
0020104Ch
per unit
Reserved
00201050h
FFFFFFFFh
DCO IR mode: Max Positive Tune for DCORSEL 0 to 4
00201054h
00000600h
DCO IR mode: Max Negative Tune for DCORSEL 0 to 4
00201058h
00001600h
DCO IR mode: Max Positive Tune for DCORSEL 5
0020105Ch
00000150h
DCO IR mode: Max Negative Tune for DCORSEL 5
00201060h
00001600h
DCO IR mode: DCO Constant (K) for DCORSEL 0 to 4
00201064h
3BA20147h
DCO IR mode: DCO Constant (K) for DCORSEL 5
00201068h
3B9DF117h
DCO ER mode: Frequency calibration
0020106Ch
per unit
Reserved
00201070h
FFFFFFFFh
DCO ER mode: Max Positive Tune for DCORSEL 0 to 4
00201074h
000005A0h
DCO ER mode: Max Negative Tune for DCORSEL 0 to 4
00201078h
00001600h
DCO ER mode: Max Positive Tune for DCORSEL 5
0020107Ch
00000140h
DCO ER mode: Max Negative Tune for DCORSEL 5
00201080h
00001600h
DCO ER mode: DCO Constant (K) for DCORSEL 0 to 4
00201084h
3BA47ED0h
DCO ER mode: DCO Constant (K) for DCORSEL 5
00201088h
3B9FE868h
PRODUCT PREVIEW
DESCRIPTION
TLV checksum
per unit = the contents can differ from device to device
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Detailed Description
139
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
Table 6-56. Device Descriptor Table(1) (continued)
DESCRIPTION
ADC14 Calibration
PRODUCT PREVIEW
REF Calibration
Random Number
BSL Configuration
TLV End
VALUE
0020108Ch
00000005h
ADC14 Calibration Length
00201090h
00000018h
Reserved
00201094h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
00201098h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
0020109Ch
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010A0h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010A4h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010A8h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010ACh
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010B0h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010B4h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010B8h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010BCh
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010C0h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010C4h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010C8h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010CCh
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010D0h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010D4h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010D8h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010DCh
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010E0h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010E4h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010E8h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010ECh
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
002010F0h
FFFFFFFFh
REF Calibration Tag
002010F4h
00000008h
REF Calibration Length
002010F8h
00000003h
Reserved
002010FCh
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
00201100h
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
00201104h
FFFFFFFFh
128-bit Random Number Tag
00201108h
0000000Dh
128-bit Random Number Length
0020110Ch
00000004h
32-bit Random Number 1
00201110h
per unit
32-bit Random Number 2
00201114h
per unit
32-bit Random Number 3
00201118h
per unit
32-bit Random Number 4
0020111Ch
per unit
BSL Configuration Tag
00201120h
0000000Fh
BSL Configuration Length
00201124h
00000004h
BSL Peripheral Interface Selection
00201128h
FFC2D0C0h
BSL Port Interface Configuration for UART
0020112Ch
FCFFFDA0h
BSL Port Interface Configuration for SPI
00201130h
F0FF9770h
BSL Port Interface Configuration for I2C
00201134h
FCFFFF72h
TLV End Word
00201138h
0BD0E11Dh
0020113Ch-00201FFFh
FFFFFFFFh
Reserved
140
ADDRESS
ADC14 Calibration Tag
Detailed Description
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
7 Applications, Implementation, and Layout
7.1
Device Connection and Layout Fundamentals
This section discusses the recommended guidelines when designing with the MSP432™ microcontrollers.
These guidelines are to make sure that the device has proper connections for powering, programming,
debugging, and optimum analog performance.
7.1.1
Power Supply Decoupling and Bulk Capacitors
TI recommends connecting a combination of a 4.7-µF plus a 100-nF low-ESR ceramic decoupling
capacitor to each AVCC and DVCC pin. Higher-value capacitors may be used but can impact supply rail
ramp-up time. Decoupling capacitors must be placed as close as possible to the pins that they decouple
(within a few millimeters). Additionally, separated grounds with a single-point connection are
recommended for better noise isolation from digital to analog circuits on the board and are especially
recommended to achieve high analog accuracy.
DVCC
+
4.7 µF
100 nF
DVSS
AVCC
Analog
Power Supply
Decoupling
+
4.7 µF 100 nF
AVSS
Figure 7-1. Power Supply Decoupling
7.1.2
External Oscillator
The device supports a low-frequency crystal (32.768 kHz) on the LFXT pins and a high-frequency crystal
on the HFXT pins. External bypass capacitors for the crystal oscillator pins are required.
It is also possible to apply digital clock signals to the LFXIN and HFXIN input pins that meet the
specifications of the respective oscillator if the appropriate LFXTBYPASS or HFXTBYPASS mode is
selected. In this case, the associated LFXOUT and HFXOUT pins can be used for other purposes.
Figure 7-2 shows a typical connection diagram.
LFXIN
or
HFXIN
CL1
LFXOUT
or
HFXOUT
CL2
Figure 7-2. Typical Crystal Connection
See the application report MSP430 32-kHz Crystal Oscillators (SLAA322) for more information on
selecting, testing, and designing a crystal oscillator with the MSP432 devices.
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
141
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Digital
Power Supply
Decoupling
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
7.1.3
www.ti.com
General Layout Recommendations
•
•
•
•
•
7.1.4
Proper grounding and short traces for external crystal to reduce parasitic capacitance. See the
application report MSP430 32-kHz Crystal Oscillators (SLAA322) for recommended layout guidelines.
Proper bypass capacitors on DVCC, AVCC, and reference pins if used.
Avoid routing any high-frequency signal close to an analog signal line. For example, keep digital
switching signals such as PWM or JTAG signals away from the oscillator circuit.
Refer to the Circuit Board Layout Techniques design guide (SLOA089) for a detailed discussion of
printed-circuit-board (PCB) layout considerations. This document is written primarily about op amps,
but the guidelines are generally applicable for all mixed-signal applications.
Proper ESD level protection should be considered to protect the device from unintended high-voltage
electrostatic discharge. See the application report MSP430 System-Level ESD Considerations
(SLAA530) for guidelines.
Do's and Don'ts
TI recommends powering AVCC and DVCC pins from the same source. At a minimum, during power up,
power down, and device operation, the voltage difference between AVCC and DVCC must not exceed the
limits specified in the Absolute Maximum Ratings section. Exceeding the specified limits may cause
malfunction of the device.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
7.2
Peripheral and Interface-Specific Design Information
7.2.1
ADC14 Peripheral
7.2.1.1
Partial Schematic
AVSS
Using an External
Positive Reference
VREF+/VEREF+
+
5 µF
50 nF
Connection to
onboard ground
VEREF-
Figure 7-3. ADC14 Grounding and Noise Considerations
7.2.1.2
Design Requirements
As with any high-resolution ADC, appropriate PCB layout and grounding techniques should be followed to
eliminate ground loops, unwanted parasitic effects, and noise.
Ground loops are formed when return current from the ADC flows through paths that are common with
other analog or digital circuitry. If care is not taken, this current can generate small unwanted offset
voltages that can add to or subtract from the reference or input voltages of the ADC. The general
guidelines in Section 7.1.1 combined with the connections shown in Section 7.2.1.1 prevent this.
In addition to grounding, ripple and noise spikes on the power-supply lines that are caused by digital
switching or switching power supplies can corrupt the conversion result. A noise-free design using
separate analog and digital ground planes with a single-point connection is recommend to achieve high
accuracy.
Figure 7-3 shows the recommended decoupling circuit when an external voltage reference is used.
142
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
The reference voltage must be a stable voltage for accurate measurements. The capacitor values that are
selected in the general guidelines filter out the high- and low-frequency ripple before the reference voltage
enters the device. In this case, the 5-µF capacitor is used to buffer the reference pin and filter any lowfrequency ripple. A 50-nF bypass capacitor is used to filter out any high-frequency noise.
7.2.1.3
Layout Guidelines
Component that are shown in the partial schematic (see Figure 7-3) should be placed as close as possible
to the respective device pins. Avoid long traces, because they add additional parasitic capacitance,
inductance, and resistance on the signal.
Avoid routing analog input signals close to a high-frequency pin (for example, a high-frequency PWM),
because the high-frequency switching can be coupled into the analog signal.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
If differential mode is used for the ADC14, the analog differential input signals must be routed closely
together to minimize the effect of noise on the resulting signal.
Applications, Implementation, and Layout
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
143
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
8 Device and Documentation Support
8.1
Device Support
8.1.1
Development Tools Support
All MSP432 microcontrollers are supported by a wide variety of software and hardware development tools.
Tools are available from TI and various third parties. See them all at www.ti.com/msp432.
8.1.1.1
Hardware Features
FAMILY
JTAG
SWD
NUMBER OF
BREAKPOINTS
ITM
DWT
FPB
MSP432P4xx
Yes
Yes
4
Yes
Yes
Yes
8.1.1.2
Recommended Hardware Options
8.1.1.2.1 Target Socket Boards
The target socket boards allow easy programming and debugging of the device using JTAG or SWD.
They also feature header pin outs for prototyping. The following table shows the compatible target boards
and the supported packages.
PRODUCT PREVIEW
DEVICE
PACKAGE
TARGET BOARD
MSP432P401RPZ
100-pin QFP (PZ100)
MSP-TS432PZ100
8.1.1.2.2 Evaluation Kits
Evaluation kits are available for some MSP432 devices. These kits feature additional hardware
components and connectivity for full system evaluation and prototyping. See www.ti.com/msp432 for
details.
8.1.1.2.3 Debugging and Programming Tools
Hardware programming and debugging tools are available from TI and from third party suppliers. See a
comprehensive list of available tools at www.ti.com/msp432.
8.1.1.2.4 Production Programmers
Production programmers expedite loading firmware to devices by programming several devices
simultaneously. See a comprehensive list of available tools at www.ti.com/msp432.
8.1.1.3
Recommended Software Options
8.1.1.3.1 Integrated Development Environments
Software development tools are available from TI or from third party suppliers. Open source solutions are
also available. The MSP432 Family is supported by Code Composer Studio™ IDE (CCS) Version 6 or
higher. See a comprehensive list of available tools at www.ti.com/msp432.
8.1.1.3.2 MSPWare
MSPWare is a collection of code examples, data sheets, and other design resources for all MSP430 and
MSP432 devices delivered in a convenient package. In addition to providing a complete collection of
existing MSP430 and MSP432 design resources, MSPWare also includes a high-level API called Driver
Library. This library makes it easy to program MSP430 or MSP432 hardware. MSPWare is available as a
component of CCS or as a stand-alone package. Visit www.ti.com/msp432 to download the stand-alone
package.
144
Device and Documentation Support
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
8.1.2
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Device and Development Tool Nomenclature
To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all
MSP432 MCU devices and support tools. Each MSP432 MCU commercial family member has one of
three prefixes: MSP, PMS, or XMS (for example, MSP432P401R). Texas Instruments recommends two of
three possible prefix designators for its support tools: MSP and MSPX. These prefixes represent
evolutionary stages of product development from engineering prototypes (with XMS for devices and MSPX
for tools) through fully qualified production devices and tools (with MSP for devices and MSP for tools).
Device development evolutionary flow:
XMS – Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device's electrical
specifications
PMS – Final silicon die that conforms to the device's electrical specifications but has not completed quality
and reliability verification
MSP – Fully qualified production device
Support tool development evolutionary flow:
MSP – Fully-qualified development-support product
XMS and PMS devices and MSPX development-support tools are shipped against the following
disclaimer:
"Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes."
MSP devices and MSP development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and
reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI's standard warranty applies.
Predictions show that prototype devices (XMS and PMS) have a greater failure rate than the standard
production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production
system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are
to be used.
TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the
package type (for example, PZP) and temperature range (for example, T). Figure 8-1 provides a legend
for reading the complete device name for any family member.
Device and Documentation Support
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
145
PRODUCT PREVIEW
MSPX – Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification
testing.
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
MSP 432 P 401R I
PZ
T XX
Processor Family
Optional: Additional Features
432 MCU Platform
Optional: Distribution Format
Packaging
Series
Feature Set
Optional: Temperature Range
Processor Family
MSP = Mixed Signal Processor
XMS = Experimental Silicon
432 MCU Platform
TI’s 32-bit Low-Power Microcontroller Platform
Series
P = Performance and Low-Power Series
Feature Set
First Digit
Second Digit
Third Digit
Fourth Digit
4 = Flash based devices
up to 48 MHz
0 = General
Purpose
1 = ADC14
R = 256KB of Flash
64KB of SRAM
M = 128KB of Flash
32KB of SRAM
PRODUCT PREVIEW
Optional:
Temperature
Range
S = 0°C to 50°C
I = –40°C to 85°C
T = –40°C to 105°C
Packaging
http://www.ti.com/packaging
Optional:
Distribution
Format
T = Small Reel
R = Large Reel
No Markings = Tube or Tray
Optional:
Additional
Features
-EP = Enhanced Product (–40°C to 105°C)
-HT = Extreme Temperature Parts (–55°C to 150°C)
-Q1 = Automotive Q100 Qualified
Figure 8-1. Device Nomenclature
8.2
Documentation Support
The following documents describe the MSP432P401x MCUs. Copies of these documents are available on
the Internet at www.ti.com.
8.2.1
SLAU356
MSP432P4xx Family Technical Reference Manual. Detailed information on all of the
modules and peripherals available in this device family.
SLAZ610
MSP432P401R Device Erratasheet. Describes the known exceptions to the functional
specifications.
Related Links
Table 8-1 lists quick access links. Categories include technical documents, support and community
resources, tools and software, and quick access to sample or buy.
Table 8-1. Related Links
146
PARTS
PRODUCT FOLDER
SAMPLE & BUY
TECHNICAL
DOCUMENTS
TOOLS &
SOFTWARE
SUPPORT &
COMMUNITY
MSP432P401R
Click here
Click here
Click here
Click here
Click here
MSP432P401M
Click here
Click here
Click here
Click here
Click here
Device and Documentation Support
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
8.2.2
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
Community Resources
The following links connect to TI community resources. Linked contents are provided "AS IS" by the
respective contributors. They do not constitute TI specifications and do not necessarily reflect TI's views;
see TI's Terms of Use.
TI E2E™ Community
TI's Engineer-to-Engineer (E2E) Community. Created to foster collaboration among engineers. At
e2e.ti.com, you can ask questions, share knowledge, explore ideas, and help solve problems with fellow
engineers.
TI Embedded Processors Wiki
Texas Instruments Embedded Processors Wiki. Established to help developers get started with embedded
processors from Texas Instruments and to foster innovation and growth of general knowledge about the
hardware and software surrounding these devices.
8.3
Trademarks
8.4
Electrostatic Discharge Caution
This integrated circuit can be damaged by ESD. Texas Instruments recommends that all integrated circuits be handled with
appropriate precautions. Failure to observe proper handling and installation procedures can cause damage.
ESD damage can range from subtle performance degradation to complete device failure. Precision integrated circuits may be more
susceptible to damage because very small parametric changes could cause the device not to meet its published specifications.
8.5
Export Control Notice
Recipient agrees to not knowingly export or re-export, directly or indirectly, any product or technical data
(as defined by the U.S., EU, and other Export Administration Regulations) including software, or any
controlled product restricted by other applicable national regulations, received from disclosing party under
nondisclosure obligations (if any), or any direct product of such technology, to any destination to which
such export or re-export is restricted or prohibited by U.S. or other applicable laws, without obtaining prior
authorization from U.S. Department of Commerce and other competent Government authorities to the
extent required by those laws.
8.6
Glossary
SLYZ022 — TI Glossary.
This glossary lists and explains terms, acronyms, and definitions.
Device and Documentation Support
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
147
PRODUCT PREVIEW
MSP430, MSP432, E2E are trademarks of Texas Instruments.
ARM, Cortex are registered trademarks of ARM Ltd.
ULPBench is a registered trademark of Embedded Microprocessor Benchmark Consortium.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
9 Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information
9.1
Packaging Information
The following pages include mechanical, packaging, and orderable information. This information is the
most current data available for the designated devices. This data is subject to change without notice and
revision of this document. For browser-based versions of this data sheet, refer to the left-hand navigation.
PZ (S-PQFP-G100)
PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK
0,27
0,17
0,50
75
0,08 M
51
PRODUCT PREVIEW
76
50
100
26
1
0,13 NOM
25
12,00 TYP
Gage Plane
14,20
SQ
13,80
16,20
SQ
15,80
0,05 MIN
1,45
1,35
0,25
0°– 7°
0,75
0,45
Seating Plane
1,60 MAX
0,08
4040149 /B 11/96
NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters.
B. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
C. Falls within JEDEC MS-026
148
Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
PRODUCT PREVIEW
www.ti.com
Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
149
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
PACKAGE OUTLINE
ZXH 80 (NFBGA - 1 mm max height)
BALL GRID ARRAY
5.1
4.9
B
A
BALL A1 CORNER
INDEX AREA
5.1
4.9
PRODUCT PREVIEW
0.7
0.6
C
1 MAX
SEATING PLANE
0.08 C
BALL TYP
0.25
TYP
0.15
4 TYP
SYMM
J
H
G
F
4
TYP
SYMM
E
D
C
B
A
0.5 TYP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
80X
0.35
0.25
0.15
0.05
C B
C
A
0.5 TYP
4221325/A 01/2014
NOTES:
1. All linear dimensions are in millimeters. Any dimensions in parenthesis is for reference only. Dimensioning and tolerancing
per ASME Y14.5M.
2. This drawing is subject to change without notice.
3. This is a Pb-free solder ball design.
150
Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
www.ti.com
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
EXAMPLE BOARD LAYOUT
ZXH 80 (NFBGA - 1 mm max height)
80
BALL GRID ARRAY
(0.5) TYP
0.265
0.235
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
(0.5) TYP
B
C
D
SYMM
E
F
PRODUCT PREVIEW
G
H
J
SYMM
LAND PATTERN EXAMPLE
SCALE:15X
0.05 MAX
( 0.25)
METAL
METAL
UNDER
MASK
0.05 MIN
( 0.25)
SOLDER MASK
OPENING
SOLDER MASK
OPENING
NON-SOLDER MASK
DEFINED
(PREFERRED)
SOLDER MASK
DEFINED
SOLDER MASK DETAILS
NOT TO SCALE
4221325/A 01/2014
NOTES: (continued)
3. Final dimensions may vary due to manufacturing tolerance considerations and also routing constraints.
See Texas Instruments Literature No. SBVA017 (www.ti.com/lit/sbva017).
Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
151
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
EXAMPLE STENCIL DESIGN
ZXH 80 (NFBGA - 1 mm max height)
BALL GRID ARRAY
(0.5) TYP
(R0.05) TYP
80X ( 0.25)
1
(0.5)
TYP
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
METAL
TYP
D
PRODUCT PREVIEW
SYMM
E
F
G
H
J
SYMM
SOLDER PASTE EXAMPLE
BASED ON 0.1 mm THICK STENCIL
SCALE:20X
4221325/A 01/2014
NOTES: (continued)
4. Laser cutting apertures with trapezoidal walls and rounded corners may offer better paste release.
152
Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
PRODUCT PREVIEW
www.ti.com
Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
153
MSP432P401R, MSP432P401M
SLAS826B – MARCH 2015 – REVISED FEBRUARY 2016
www.ti.com
PRODUCT PREVIEW
154
Mechanical, Packaging, and Orderable Information
Copyright © 2015–2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated
Submit Documentation Feedback
Product Folder Links: MSP432P401R MSP432P401M
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
23-Oct-2015
PACKAGING INFORMATION
Orderable Device
Status
(1)
Package Type Package Pins Package
Drawing
Qty
Eco Plan
Lead/Ball Finish
MSL Peak Temp
(2)
(6)
(3)
Op Temp (°C)
Device Marking
(4/5)
XMS432P401MIPZR
PREVIEW
LQFP
PZ
100
1000
TBD
Call TI
Call TI
-40 to 85
XMS432P401RIPZR
PREVIEW
LQFP
PZ
100
1000
TBD
Call TI
Call TI
-40 to 85
(1)
The marketing status values are defined as follows:
ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs.
LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect.
NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design.
PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available.
OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device.
(2)
Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability
information and additional product content details.
TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined.
Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that
lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes.
Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between
the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above.
Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight
in homogeneous material)
(3)
MSL, Peak Temp. - The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature.
(4)
There may be additional marking, which relates to the logo, the lot trace code information, or the environmental category on the device.
(5)
Multiple Device Markings will be inside parentheses. Only one Device Marking contained in parentheses and separated by a "~" will appear on a device. If a line is indented then it is a continuation
of the previous line and the two combined represent the entire Device Marking for that device.
(6)
Lead/Ball Finish - Orderable Devices may have multiple material finish options. Finish options are separated by a vertical ruled line. Lead/Ball Finish values may wrap to two lines if the finish
value exceeds the maximum column width.
Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information
provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and
continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals.
TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release.
In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis.
Addendum-Page 1
Samples
PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM
www.ti.com
23-Oct-2015
Addendum-Page 2
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, enhancements, improvements and other
changes to its semiconductor products and services per JESD46, latest issue, and to discontinue any product or service per JESD48, latest
issue. Buyers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and
complete. All semiconductor products (also referred to herein as “components”) are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale
supplied at the time of order acknowledgment.
TI warrants performance of its components to the specifications applicable at the time of sale, in accordance with the warranty in TI’s terms
and conditions of sale of semiconductor products. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary
to support this warranty. Except where mandated by applicable law, testing of all parameters of each component is not necessarily
performed.
TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or the design of Buyers’ products. Buyers are responsible for their products and
applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with Buyers’ products and applications, Buyers should provide
adequate design and operating safeguards.
TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright, mask work right, or
other intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI components or services are used. Information
published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license to use such products or services or a warranty or
endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the
third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI.
Reproduction of significant portions of TI information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration
and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered
documentation. Information of third parties may be subject to additional restrictions.
Resale of TI components or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that component or service
voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI component or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice.
TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements.
Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it is solely responsible for compliance with all legal, regulatory and safety-related requirements
concerning its products, and any use of TI components in its applications, notwithstanding any applications-related information or support
that may be provided by TI. Buyer represents and agrees that it has all the necessary expertise to create and implement safeguards which
anticipate dangerous consequences of failures, monitor failures and their consequences, lessen the likelihood of failures that might cause
harm and take appropriate remedial actions. Buyer will fully indemnify TI and its representatives against any damages arising out of the use
of any TI components in safety-critical applications.
In some cases, TI components may be promoted specifically to facilitate safety-related applications. With such components, TI’s goal is to
help enable customers to design and create their own end-product solutions that meet applicable functional safety standards and
requirements. Nonetheless, such components are subject to these terms.
No TI components are authorized for use in FDA Class III (or similar life-critical medical equipment) unless authorized officers of the parties
have executed a special agreement specifically governing such use.
Only those TI components which TI has specifically designated as military grade or “enhanced plastic” are designed and intended for use in
military/aerospace applications or environments. Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any military or aerospace use of TI components
which have not been so designated is solely at the Buyer's risk, and that Buyer is solely responsible for compliance with all legal and
regulatory requirements in connection with such use.
TI has specifically designated certain components as meeting ISO/TS16949 requirements, mainly for automotive use. In any case of use of
non-designated products, TI will not be responsible for any failure to meet ISO/TS16949.
Products
Applications
Audio
www.ti.com/audio
Automotive and Transportation
www.ti.com/automotive
Amplifiers
amplifier.ti.com
Communications and Telecom
www.ti.com/communications
Data Converters
dataconverter.ti.com
Computers and Peripherals
www.ti.com/computers
DLP® Products
www.dlp.com
Consumer Electronics
www.ti.com/consumer-apps
DSP
dsp.ti.com
Energy and Lighting
www.ti.com/energy
Clocks and Timers
www.ti.com/clocks
Industrial
www.ti.com/industrial
Interface
interface.ti.com
Medical
www.ti.com/medical
Logic
logic.ti.com
Security
www.ti.com/security
Power Mgmt
power.ti.com
Space, Avionics and Defense
www.ti.com/space-avionics-defense
Microcontrollers
microcontroller.ti.com
Video and Imaging
www.ti.com/video
RFID
www.ti-rfid.com
OMAP Applications Processors
www.ti.com/omap
TI E2E Community
e2e.ti.com
Wireless Connectivity
www.ti.com/wirelessconnectivity
Mailing Address: Texas Instruments, Post Office Box 655303, Dallas, Texas 75265
Copyright © 2016, Texas Instruments Incorporated